- Added version 2.0.2 files.

nigel.stanger / ouexam

Browse code - Added version 2.0.2 files. master OUEXAM_2_4_2 OUEXAM_2_4_1 OUEXAM_2_4 OUEXAM_2_3_2 OUEXAM_2_3_1 OUEXAM_2_3 OUEXAM_2_2 OUEXAM_2_1_3_FINAL OUEXAM_2_1_3 OUEXAM_2_1_2 OUEXAM_2_1_1 OUEXAM_2_1 OUEXAM_2_0_2
1 parent 8c95b15 commit 7b9f0795f666bc8119c0b92d74048ebadcdfc93f nstanger authored on 5 Apr 2004

Patch

Showing 4 changed files

Ignore Space Show notes View FAQ 0 → 100755
Q: The number of marks for my questions are not going at the end of the line even though there is plenty of room for them to fit. A: You probably have a blank line between the end of your question text and the \end{question} macro that actually generates the number of marks. The line break gets processed by TeX before the number of marks is generated and effectively generates a new paragraph. Until I figure out how to stop this from happening, the workaround is to not leave blank lines between the end of the question text and the \end{question}.

Ignore Space Show notes View

FAQ 0 → 100755

Ignore Space Show notes View README
ouexam v2.0.2 ============= ouexam document class v2.0.2, 22 August 2002 Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago This LaTeX2e document class enables the production of University of Otago formatted examination papers. It handles all the fiddly layout requirements (such as printing `TURN OVER' at the bottom of every page except the last), and also ensures that the actual number of marks for questions in the examination add up to the expected number of marks. WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.2 * If you omitted any of the required title page macros (\examyear, \papernumber, \papertitle or \department), ouexam crashed when trying to report the error. Fixed. * Added the ability to specify "FY" (full-year) as a semester type in the \semester macro. WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.1 * There was a bug in the definition of the macros for numbering sub-sub-questions that meant they were numbered as "(a)" instead of the correct "(i)". Fixed. * When referencing sub-questions or sub-sub-questions, the entire question number was included (that is, "1(b)(iii)" instead of just "(iii)"). This made it difficult to sensibly reference these items, so the relevant macros have been changed to omit this prefixed information. References to questions now print as "1", sub-questions as "(b)" and sub-sub-questions as "(iii)". If this does not suit your requirements, change the \labelquestion, \labelsubquestion or \labelsubsubquestion macros. REQUIREMENTS ouexam requires the verbatim class, which should be standard on most LaTeX installations. The class documentation uses the graphicx and hyperref packages, so you will have to install these first if you don't have them already. INSTALLING (UNIX OR SIMILAR) A makefile is provided: * `make' will produce both ouexam.cls and ouexam.dvi (see below). * `make class' will produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory somewhere in your TeX search path (e.g., if you use teTeX, put it in texmf/tex/latex/ouexam or somewhere similar). * `make doc' will produce ouexam.dvi. * If you have GhostScript and the dvipdf command, `make pdfdoc' will produce PDF documentation. INSTALLING (EVERYTHING ELSE) Run ouexam.ins through LaTeX to produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory somewhere in your LaTeX search path. Then run ouexam.dtx through LaTeX _three_ (yes, three) times to produce the documentation (ouexam.dvi). PDF documentation can be produced from the DVI by whatever means you normally use to do so. ouexam v2.0.1 ============= ouexam document class v2.0.1, 30 April 2002 Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago This LaTeX2e document class enables the production of University of Otago formatted examination papers. It handles all the fiddly layout requirements (such as printing `TURN OVER' at the bottom of every page except the last), and also ensures that the actual number of marks for questions in the examination add up to the expected number of marks. WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.1 * There was a bug in the definition of the macros for numbering sub-sub-questions that meant they were numbered as "(a)" instead of the correct "(i)". Fixed. * When referencing sub-questions or sub-sub-questions, the entire question number was included (that is, "1(b)(iii)" instead of just "(iii)"). This made it difficult to sensibly reference these items, so the relevant macros have been changed to omit this prefixed information. References to questions now print as "1", sub-questions as "(b)" and sub-sub-questions as "(iii)". If this does not suit your requirements, change the \labelquestion, \labelsubquestion or \labelsubsubquestion macros. REQUIREMENTS ouexam requires the verbatim class, which should be standard on most LaTeX installations. The class documentation uses the graphicx and hyperref packages, so you will have to install these first if you don't have them already. INSTALLING (UNIX OR SIMILAR) A makefile is provided: * `make' will produce both ouexam.cls and ouexam.dvi (see below). * `make class' will produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory somewhere in your TeX search path (e.g., if you use teTeX, put it in texmf/tex/latex/ouexam or somewhere similar). * `make doc' will produce ouexam.dvi. * If you have GhostScript and the dvipdf command, `make pdfdoc' will produce PDF documentation. INSTALLING (EVERYTHING ELSE) Run ouexam.ins through LaTeX to produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory somewhere in your LaTeX search path. Then run ouexam.dtx through LaTeX _three_ (yes, three) times to produce the documentation (ouexam.dvi). PDF documentation can be produced from the DVI by whatever means you normally use to do so.

Ignore Space Show notes View

README

ouexam v2.0.2
=============

ouexam document class v2.0.2, 22 August 2002

This LaTeX2e document class enables the production of University of Otago
formatted examination papers. It handles all the fiddly layout requirements
(such as printing `TURN OVER' at the bottom of every page except the last),
and also ensures that the actual number of marks for questions in the
examination add up to the expected number of marks.

WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.2

* If you omitted any of the required title page macros (\examyear,
  \papernumber, \papertitle or \department), ouexam crashed when trying
  to report the error. Fixed.

* Added the ability to specify "FY" (full-year) as a semester type in the
  \semester macro.

WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.1

* There was a bug in the definition of the macros for numbering
  sub-sub-questions that meant they were numbered as "(a)" instead of the
  correct "(i)". Fixed.

* When referencing sub-questions or sub-sub-questions, the entire question
  number was included (that is, "1(b)(iii)" instead of just "(iii)"). This
  made it difficult to sensibly reference these items, so the relevant
  macros have been changed to omit this prefixed information. References to
  questions now print as "1", sub-questions as "(b)" and sub-sub-questions
  as "(iii)". If this does not suit your requirements, change the
  \labelquestion, \labelsubquestion or \labelsubsubquestion macros.

REQUIREMENTS

ouexam requires the verbatim class, which should be standard on most LaTeX
installations. The class documentation uses the graphicx and hyperref
packages, so you will have to install these first if you don't have them
already.

INSTALLING (UNIX OR SIMILAR)

A makefile is provided:

* `make' will produce both ouexam.cls and ouexam.dvi (see below).

* `make class' will produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory
	  somewhere in your TeX search path (e.g., if you use teTeX, put it in
	  texmf/tex/latex/ouexam or somewhere similar).

* `make doc' will produce ouexam.dvi.
	
	* If you have GhostScript and the dvipdf command, `make pdfdoc' will
	  produce PDF documentation.

INSTALLING (EVERYTHING ELSE)

Run ouexam.ins through LaTeX to produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a
directory somewhere in your LaTeX search path. Then run ouexam.dtx through
LaTeX _three_ (yes, three) times to produce the documentation (ouexam.dvi).
PDF documentation can be produced from the DVI by whatever means you
normally use to do so.

ouexam v2.0.1
=============

ouexam document class v2.0.1, 30 April 2002

WHAT'S NEW IN VERSION 2.0.1

* There was a bug in the definition of the macros for numbering
  sub-sub-questions that meant they were numbered as "(a)" instead of the
  correct "(i)". Fixed.

REQUIREMENTS

INSTALLING (UNIX OR SIMILAR)

A makefile is provided:

* `make' will produce both ouexam.cls and ouexam.dvi (see below).

* `make class' will produce ouexam.cls. Place this file in a directory
	  somewhere in your TeX search path (e.g., if you use teTeX, put it in
	  texmf/tex/latex/ouexam or somewhere similar).

* `make doc' will produce ouexam.dvi.
	
	* If you have GhostScript and the dvipdf command, `make pdfdoc' will
	  produce PDF documentation.

INSTALLING (EVERYTHING ELSE)

Ignore Space Show notes View TODO
¥ Figure out how to gobble line breaks before a \end{subquestion} so that they don't screw up the positioning of the number of marks. A similar issue seems to arise with lgrind'ed listings that appear at the end of questions (but this actually causes things to break). ¥ Some way of entering timings for questions (Andrew L.): > Further to our discussion on exam timings. Maybe it would be > useful to provide a way to show the timings for each question > using your LaTeX exam class? Perhaps they could appear in the > margin next to each question. ¥ Add up marks for marking schedule and check they are the same as the total marks for a question (Richard?). ¥ Generate marking sheets from the marking schedule info? (to appear at end of document) ¥ Reinstate question mark subtotals as a class option (format [Question y total x marks]). ¥ Options for positioning of mark amounts (end of question vs. in margin). ¥ Styles for number of marks? ¥ Options for positioning of page numbers (footer vs. header). ¥ Different types of questions (e.g., multiple choice, fill in the blank, etc.). ¥ Does the draft option need to be passed to the article class? ¥ \questionskip: how much whitespace after a question (default \baselineskip). Turn this off when markingschedule is active? ¥ Add up marks for marking schedule and check they are the same as the total marks for a question (Richard?). ¥ Generate marking sheets from the marking schedule info? (to appear at end of document) ¥ Reinstate question mark subtotals as a class option (format [Question y total x marks]). ¥ Options for positioning of mark amounts (end of question vs. in margin). ¥ Options for positioning of page numbers (footer vs. header). ¥ Different types of questions (e.g., multiple choice, fill in the blank, etc.). ¥ Does the draft option need to be passed to the article class? ¥ \questionskip: how much whitespace after a question (default \baselineskip). Turn this off when markingschedule is active?

Ignore Space Show notes View

TODO

¥ Figure out how to gobble line breaks before a \end{subquestion} so that they
  don't screw up the positioning of the number of marks. A similar issue seems
  to arise with lgrind'ed listings that appear at the end of questions (but
  this actually causes things to break).

¥ Some way of entering timings for questions (Andrew L.):

> Further to our discussion on exam timings. Maybe it would be 
> useful to provide a way to show the timings for each question
> using your LaTeX exam class? Perhaps they could appear in the 
> margin next to each question.

¥ Add up marks for marking schedule and check they are the same as the total
  marks for a question (Richard?).

¥ Generate marking sheets from the marking schedule info? (to appear at end
  of document)

¥ Reinstate question mark subtotals as a class option (format [Question y total
  x marks]).

¥ Options for positioning of mark amounts (end of question vs. in margin).

¥ Styles for number of marks?

¥ Options for positioning of page numbers (footer vs. header).

¥ Different types of questions (e.g., multiple choice, fill in the blank, etc.).

¥ Does the draft option need to be passed to the article class?

¥ \questionskip: how much whitespace after a question (default \baselineskip).
  Turn this off when markingschedule is active?

Ignore Space Show notes View ouexam.dtx
\def\ouexamdate{22 August 2002} \def\ouexamversion{2.0.2} \def\ouexamshortdate{2002/08/22} % \iffalse meta-comment %% %% ouexam.dtx Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago %% %% You may use this package freely, and also distribute it %% provided that you don't change it, make any money off %% it or pretend that you wrote it. %% %<driver> \documentclass{ltxdoc} \usepackage{doc} \DisableCrossrefs \CodelineNumbered \RecordChanges \usepackage{graphicx} % change hyperref options as required \usepackage[dvips,colorlinks,pdfpagemode=None,a4paper,urlcolor=blue, linkcolor=red,pdfauthor={Nigel Stanger}]{hyperref} \title{The \textsf{ouexam} document class, v\ouexamversion} \author{Nigel Stanger\\nstanger@infoscience.otago.ac.nz} \date{\ouexamdate} \begin{document} \maketitle \DocInput{ouexam.dtx} \end{document} %</driver> % % \fi % %% \CheckSum{771} %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z %% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z %% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 %% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# %% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& %% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) %% Asterisk \ Plus \+ Comma \, %% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ %% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< %% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? %% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ %% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \\| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} %% % % \MakeShortVerb{\\|} % % \changes{1.0}{1999/04/15}{Initial version.} % % \begin{abstract} % This document class allows you to create Otago University final % examination papers using \LaTeXe\@. It implements the major formatting % requirements specified by the University, provides useful % macros to ease the process of building the title page and automatically % deals with fiddly little issues such as question and section numbering, % the number of pages in the paper, printing ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the % bottom right corner of every page except the last one and ensuring that the % total number of marks for a question adds up to the expected number. % \end{abstract} % % % \tableofcontents % % % \section{Overview} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/11}{NJS Added note on backwards compatibility.} % \subsection{Important note on backwards compatibility} % % Version 2.0 of \textsf{ouexam} introduces several major changes from earlier % versions. Consequently, documents created using an earlier version of % \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{incompatible} with version 2.0 or later. Versions 2.0 % and greater of \textsf{ouexam} will detect attempts to process version 1.x % document and display an error message. % % The older version (1.2) is still available and can be downloaded from the same % location as the current version. To process older version documents, just copy % the version 1.2 \|ouexam.cls\| file into the same directory as the document file. % \TeX\ searches the current directory first, so this copy will take precedence % over any other installed version of \textsf{ouexam}. % % % \subsection{Class options} % % This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of % the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The default options are % \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. % Normally the only one you might want to change is the last one. % In addition, \textsf{ouexam} accepts the following ``native'' class options: % \begin{description} % \item[\textsf{draft}] \DescribeMacro{draft} This option has the usual % effects that you would expect for \textsf{draft} mode in the % \textsf{article} class, plus \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in % the header of every page. Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} % package and turn on the \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all % included graphics will be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the % \|draft=false\| option to \cs{includegraphics}. % % \item[\textsf{markingschedule}] \DescribeMacro{markingschedule} This option % Rather than write a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, you % can use the \textsf{marking} environment to embed marking information % within questions (see % \hyperref[Sec:Questions:Marking]{section~\ref{Sec:Questions:Marking}}). % By default this information is not printed (for obvious reasons!), but % when it comes time to print a marking schedule for the examination, % including the \textsf{markingschedule} class option in the % \cs{usepackage} command will cause \textsf{ouexam} to print the hidden % content. It will also print \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} in the footer of % every page. % \end{description} % % % \subsection{Required packages} % % This class requires the \textsf{verbatim} package in order to implement % the marking schedule functionality. % % % \subsection{Page margins} % % This class assumes A4 paper. You will probably get weird results if you try % to do anything different. The margins are set up as follows: top and bottom % 2cm (headers and footers are inside this margin), left and right 2.54cm (1in). % % % \subsection{Page styles} % % There are three page styles defined in this class: % \begin{description} % \item[\textsf{plain}] \DescribeMacro{plain} This is a slight modification % of the \textsf{plain} page style from \textsf{article}. It produces pages % that have the page number centered at the top, the paper number in the top % right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom right. This % is the default page style. % % \item[\textsf{lastpage}] \DescribeMacro{lastpage} This is similar to % \textsf{plain} but without the ``\textbf{TURN OVER}''. It is used for the % last page of the examination. You normally will not have to use this % yourself---the class should take care of it automatically. The class does % however occasionally seem to get confused, so there may times when you have % to set the page style of the last page manually. It will be fairly obvious % when you need to do this---the usual effect is that the last page % has``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' printed on it when it should not. % % \item[\textsf{titlepage}] \DescribeMacro{titlepage} This is similar to % \textsf{plain} but without the page header, and is used for the title page % of the paper. As with \textsf{lastpage}, you will normally not use this % yourself, because the \cs{maketitlepage} macro handles this automatically % (see \hyperref[Sec:TitlePage]{section~\ref{Sec:TitlePage}}). % \end{description} % % % \section{Writing an examination paper} % % % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/05/11}{NJS Moved the title page subsection to the start % of this section.} % \subsection{The title page} % \label{Sec:TitlePage} % % This class defines a collection of macros that let you fill in the various % parts of the examination title page. This is analogous to the process you use % to generate the title of a document in, for example, the \textsf{article} class % (using \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{date} and \cs{maketitle}). That is, you % issue the macros described below in the document preamble, then issue a % \cs{maketitlepage} in the document body. % % The \DescribeMacro{\examyear} \cs{examyear} macro lets you specify the year % in which the examination is being held, for example, \|\examyear{1999}\|. This % macro is mandatory. % % The \DescribeMacro{\department} \cs{department} macro lets you specify the % name of the department that produced the examination paper, for example, % \|\department{Information\| \|Science}\|. This macro is mandatory. % % The \DescribeMacro{\papernumber} \cs{papernumber} macro lets you specify the % paper number that the examination is for, for example, % \|\papernumber{COMP 101}\|. This macro is mandatory. \textbf{Warning:} Do not make % the paper number string too long or it will overlap the page number. Be % particularly careful when you specify semester information using \cs{semester}, % because this is appended to the paper number in the page header. For example, % if you specify \|\papernumber{COMP 101}\| and \|\semester{2}\|, the header will % contain ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)'' rather than just ``COMP 101''. The worst % case you will need to consider in such situations is a special examination, % which inserts the text ``(Special Examination)'' after the paper number. % % The \DescribeMacro{\papertitle} \cs{papertitle} macro lets you specify the % title of the paper, for example, % \|\papertitle{Systems Analysis and Design Methods}\|. This macro is mandatory. % % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added `FY' to the \cs{semester} macro % description.} % Some papers are offered in more than one semester. The % \DescribeMacro{\semester} \cs{semester} macro lets you specify which % semester the examination is for. The argument can be either ``1'' or ``2'' % for semesters 1 and 2, ``SS'' for summer school, ``FY'' for a full-year % paper or ``SP'' for a special examination, for example, \|\semester{2}\|. % Invalid values for the argument cause a warning to be raised. This macro is % optional---if you omit it, no semester information is generated. % % The \DescribeMacro{\timeallowed} \cs{timeallowed} macro lets you specify the % length of the examination in hours, for example, \|\timeallowed{2}\|. This % macro is optional---if you omit it, it defaults to three (3) hours. % % If calculators are allowed in the examination, use the % \DescribeMacro{\allowcalculators} \cs{allowcalculators} macro. This macro is % optional---if you omit it, a sentence is printed saying that calculators % are \emph{not} allowed. % % The \DescribeMacro{\instructions} \cs{instructions} macro lets you specify % instructions on how candidates should complete the % examination, for example, \|\instructions{Answer ALL\| \|questions.}\|. This macro % is optional. Note that the content of the instructions can be just about % anything. It is up to you to control formatting, such as how you want lines % broken, etc. This also true of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and % \cs{otherinstructions} macros described below. % % The \DescribeMacro{\material} \cs{material} macro lets you specify any % additional material that candidates are provided in addition to the % examination paper itself, for example, \|\material{SQL schema definition}\|. % This macro is optional. % % The \DescribeMacro{\copiesof} \cs{copiesof} macro lets you specify any % material that candidates are allowed to bring into the examination, for % example, \|\copiesof{McFadden &\| \|Hoffer, 5th edition}\|. This macro is % optional. % % The \DescribeMacro{\otherinstructions} \cs{otherinstructions} macro lets you % specify any other instructions not covered by any of the above, for example, % \|\otherinstructions{No smoking\| \|allowed.}\|. This macro is optional. % % Once you have specified the content of the title page using the above % macros, you simply issue a \DescribeMacro{\maketitlepage} \cs{maketitlepage} % to generate the front page of the examination (cf. \cs{maketitle}). The title % page generated meets University formatting requirements. % Note that the number of pages in the examination paper is generated % and inserted into the title page automatically---you do not need to specify % it manually. % % % \subsection{Sections} % \label{Sec:Sections} % % Examination papers may optionally have multiple sections, ``numbered'' A, % B, \ldots. Rather than redefine the existing section macros, this class % defines an \DescribeEnv{examsection} \textsf{examsection} % environment\footnote{Note that the old \cs{newsection} macro has been % retained for backwards compatibility with earlier development versions of % \textsf{ouexam}. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro % and should be used in all new documents.} that generates a new section. The % \textsf{examsection} environment has three mandatory arguments: % \begin{enumerate} % \item The expected number of marks for the question. If you leave this % argument empty it defaults to zero. \textsf{ouexam} keeps a running total % of the \emph{actual} number of marks encountered within a section, which is % compared with the value of this argument when the environment is closed. % An error is raised if the values are not equal. The running total is also % typeset right-justified in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 20 MARKS]}'' % as an additional verification. % % \item Instructions for answering questions in this section (such as % ``Answer any TWO questions.''). If you leave this argument empty it % defaults to ``ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.''. % % \item A description of the topic of the section. This can be left % empty. % \end{enumerate} % Every section begins on a new page, and the section title is formatted as % ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in \cs{large} size. For example: \\ % % \noindent\|\begin{examsection}{25}{}{These questions are remarkably boring.}\| \\ % \hspace{1cm}\vdots \\ % \|\end{examsection}\| \\ % % \noindent will produce the following (assuming that the actual number of % marks in the question is correct): % % \begin{center} % \fbox{% % \begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth} % {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~A}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] % ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS. \\ % These questions are remarkably boring. \\ % \hspace{2cm}\vdots \\ % \mbox{}\hfill\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 25 MARKS]} % \end{minipage} % } % \end{center} % % % \subsection{Questions} % \label{Sec:Questions} % % \textsf{ouexam} provides three environments for building examination % questions: \DescribeEnv{question} \textsf{question}, % \DescribeEnv{subquestion} \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion}, % which correspond to top-level questions, parts of questions, and % \DescribeEnv{subsubquestion} sub-parts of questions respectively. They % produce questions that are numbered according to University examination % formatting requirements. Note that questions are normally numbered % sequentially throughout the entire paper regardless of any section % boundaries. % % All three environments have a single mandatory argument which is the % expected number of marks for the question, part or sub-part. If this % argument is left empty it will default to zero. This argument works in much % the same way as the first argument to the \textsf{examsection} environment % (see \hyperref[Sec:Sections]{section~\ref{Sec:Sections}}): \textsf{ouexam} % keeps a running total of the number of marks encountered within each % question part and sub-part, and compares this total with the expected value % when the environment closes. Where appropriate, the running total is % typeset right-justified in the form ``(5 marks)''. For example: % \begin{verbatim} % \begin{question}{5} % \begin{subquestion}{2} % Why is the sky blue? % \end{subquestion} % \begin{subquestion}{3} % Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % \begin{question}{1} % Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. % \end{question} % \end{verbatim} % % \noindent will produce the following: % \begin{center} % \fbox{% % \begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth} % \begin{enumerate} % \item % \begin{enumerate} % \item Why is the sky blue? \hfill (2 marks) % % \item Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. \hfill (3 % marks) % \end{enumerate} % % \item Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. \hfill (1 % mark) % \end{enumerate} % \end{minipage} % } % \end{center} % % The \textsf{question} environments handle formatting of marks totals % automatically, including considerations such as: % \begin{itemize} % \item whether or not to print the number of marks for a question at all % (they should not be printed if the question has sub-parts); % % \item whether to print ``mark'' or ``marks'' (e.g., question 2 above); and % % \item where to position the number of marks relative to the question, % depending on how full the last line of the question is. % \end{itemize} % % % \subsection{Marking schedule information} % \label{Sec:Questions:Marking} % % Rather than writing a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, % you can use the \DescribeEnv{marking} \textsf{marking} environment to embed % marking information within questions. By default this information is not % printed (for obvious reasons!), but when it comes time to print a marking % schedule for the examination, use the \textsf{markingschedule} class option % to print the hidden content. The marking information will be printed in % \emph{italics} to differentiate it from the main body of the examination, % and \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} will also be printed in the footer of every % page. % % % \subsection{Miscellaneous} % % Most examinationss are marked out of 100, and \textsf{ouexam} defaults to % this. However, if you want an examination that is marked out of some other % number, for example, 90 marks, you can specify this using the % \DescribeMacro{\examoutof} \cs{examoutof} macro. Thus, \|\examoutof{90}\| % will set the expected number of marks for the examination to 90. This value % is used by \textsf{ouexam} to verify that the marks for all the questions % add up to the expected number of marks for the examination. % % % \section{Errors and warnings} % % In this section are described the error messages and warning produced by % \textsf{ouexam}, and the reasons why they occur. % % % \subsection{Error messages} % % \noindent\texttt{INCOMPATIBLE (\ldots): this document was written for an % earlier} \\ % \texttt{version of ouexam \ldots} \\ % You are trying to use v2.0 or later of \textsf{ouexam} with a document that % was written for \textsf{ouexam} v1.2 or earlier. Versions 2.0 and later of % \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{fundamentally incompatible} with earlier % versions. The only solutions here are either to revert to \textsf{ouexam} % v1.2 or earlier (you can put a copy of the class file in the same directory % as the document), or rewrite the document to conform to the current version % of \textsf{ouexam}. You should be able to download a copy of v1.2 from the % same location that you found the current version. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{examyear} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{department} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papernumber} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papertitle} was specified} \\ % You have not specified one of these macros. All four of these macros are % mandatory and must be included in the preamble of any \textsf{ouexam} % document. \\ % % % \subsection{Warnings} % % \noindent\texttt{actual number of marks for exam (\ldots) does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{number of marks (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for the whole examination (calculated % by summing the marks for all the questions) is not the same as the expected % total for the examination. Adjust the marks for the questions until the % totals match. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for section \ldots\ does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{mark (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for a particular section (calculated by % summing the marks for all the questions in that section) is not the same as % the expected total for that section. Adjust the marks for the questions in % the section concerned until the totals match. The section number is given % in the warning. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for question \ldots\ does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{mark (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for a particular question (calculated % by summing the marks of all its sub-parts) is not the same as the expected % total for that question. Adjust the marks for the sub-parts of the % question until the totals match. The question number is given % in the warning. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{DEPRECATED: The \cs{newsection} macro is deprecated; use % the} \\ % \texttt{examsection environment instead} \\ % The \cs{newsection} macro is a hangover from earlier versions of % \textsf{ouexam}, and has been left in v2.0 for backwards compatibility with % some documents that use it. The entire sectioning mechanism was rewritten % from scratch for v2.0, so this macro is now deprecated and will eventually % disappear. You should use the \textsf{examsection} environment % instead. \\ % % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added `FY' to \cs{semester} error % description.} % \noindent\texttt{invalid value `\ldots' for \cs{semester}; valid values are % `1', `2', `SS',} \\ % \texttt{`FY' and `SP'. No semester information will be printed} \\* You % have given an invalid value as the argument to the \cs{semester} macro. The % allowed values are `1' (semester one), `2' (semester two), `SS' (summer % school), `FY' (full-year) and `SP' (special examination). Any other values % will be ignored. Note that these are case-sensitive, for example, `sp' is % invalid. \\ % % % \section{Example} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/25}{NJS Updated example to conform to 2.0 changes.} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Updated example to conform to 1.1 changes.} % The code given below is for the first three pages of the INFO~321 2001 % final examination. The output produced by this source is shown in % \hyperref[Fig.Example]{figure~\ref{Fig.Example} on % page~\pageref{Fig.Example}}. Particular points to note in this example % are: % % \begin{itemize} % % \item The number of hours is not specified, so it defaults to three. % % \item This examination allows calculators. % % \item The \textsf{listings} package is used to typeset code listings. % % \item The argument of the \cs{instructions} macro can be just about % anything, as can the arguments of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and % \cs{otherinstructions} macros. In this example, the \cs{instructions} % macro has been omitted, causing \textsf{ouexam} to output the default % instructions. % % \item Marking schedule information has been embedded within the % questions. \hyperref[Fig.Example2]{Figure~\ref{Fig.Example2} on % page~\pageref{Fig.Example2}} shows the output produced by this source % when the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is used. % % \end{itemize} % % \small % \begin{verbatim} % \documentclass{ouexam} % % \usepackage{graphicx} % \usepackage{listings} % % \examyear{2001} % \department{Information Science} % \papernumber{INFO 321} % \papertitle{Database Systems} % \allowcalculators % % \begin{document} % % \lstloadlanguages{ODL,OQL,[Oracle8]SQL,[Oracle8]PLSQL} % \lstset{basicstyle=\sffamily, stringspaces=false, tabsize=2, % indent=1cm, belowskip=0pt, commentstyle=\itshape, % labelstyle=\scriptsize, labelsep=5pt, labelstep=1,} % % \maketitlepage % % \begin{examsection}{25}{}{Questions in this section (total 25 marks) % relate to physical database design and tuning.} % % % \begin{question}{10} % % A major U.S. mail order firm is having performance problems with queries % on the \textsf{Customer} table in its Oracle8 order-processing database. % Consider the following information about the \textsf{Customer} table, % then answer the questions below: \\ % % \textsf{\textbf{Customer}(\underline{customer\_no}, name, address, city, % state, country, phone, email, status)} % % \begin{itemize} % \item \textsf{customer\_no} is the primary key and because this is an % Oracle8 database, a unique B-tree index has been automatically created % on this column. % % \item \textsf{status} is a single character column that holds one of % the values `I' (inactive), `B' (bronze), `S' (silver) or `G' (gold). % The value of this column is determined by a customer's order history. % % \item About 10\% of customers are inactive, about 50\% have bronze % status, about 35\% have silver status and about 5\% have gold status. % % \item The average row size is about 200 bytes and there are % approximately 5,000,000 rows. % % \item The \textsf{Customer} table is heavily queried (averaging thirty % new queries per minute) by four different groups of employees. Group~1 % queries only inactive customers, group~2 queries only bronze status % customers and groups~3 and~4 both query only silver and gold status % customers. Members of any group may query the table at any time and % queries often overlap. % % \item UPDATE, INSERT and DELETE operations on the table are uncommon. % % \item Very few queries are for individual customers; rather, most % queries are based on various combinations of values from % \textsf{status}, \textsf{city}, \textsf{state} and \textsf{country}. % \end{itemize}\medskip % % \begin{subquestion}{3} % Describe and justify an \emph{index-based} physical tuning solution % that will improve the performance of queries on the \textsf{Customer} % table. (No code is required.) % \begin{marking} % Since queries tend to be on combinations of several low-cardinality % columns [1] and the table is very large [1], the most effective % solution would be to place bitmap indexes on status, city, state and % country [1]. % % B-tree indexes on any of the individual columns would not be ideal % because of their low cardinality. A possible alternative is a % composite B-tree index on all four columns [1 for suggesting this if % appropriate], but this is not ideal and would be much larger than % the four bitmap indexes [1 for this explanation if appropriate]. % Hashing is definitely \emph{not} an option, because very few queries % are exact match. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{7} % \begin{subsubquestion}{5}\label{nonindex} % Assuming that there are two identical fast disks available, describe % and justify two alternative \emph{non index-based} physical tuning % solutions that will improve the performance of queries on the % \textsf{Customer} table. For each solution include details of how % the two disks will be used. (No code is required.) % \begin{marking} % Alternative 1: partition the table across the two disks based on % status (four partitions, one for each status value) [1]. This will % allow simultaneous parallel access to different parts of the table % by the different groups [1]. Since two groups both access silver % and gold customers, it makes sense to put the silver customers on % disk one and the gold customers on disk two. Bronze customers % account for 50\% of the table, so it makes sense to also put them % on disk two (as the gold customers are the smallest group), and % put the inactive customers on disk one with the silver customers. % [1 for any sensible partitioning scheme] % % Alternative 2: replicate the table across both disks (one replica % on each disk) [1]. This will also provide simultaneous parallel % access to the data (hard to tell whether this would be better or % worse than the partitioning above) [1]. % % Note that any solution must be capable of being implemented in % Oracle8. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % Briefly discuss the relative advantages and/or disadvantages of the % two alternative solutions you described in part~(\ref{nonindex}) % above. % \begin{marking} % The partitioning solution given above doesn't really help with the % bronze customer rows---we would need random horizontal % partitioning to really help with this, which Oracle8 doesn't % support. More generally, Oracle8 does not migrate rows into the % correct partition if a customer's status changes, so the data will % need to be reloaded occasionally [1]. % % For replication, we have the usual problem of keeping the replicas % synchronised if they are both read/write. This is somewhat % mitigated by the fact that there are only two copies [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % % \newpage % \begin{question}{10} % There are two generic parameters that affect the structure of a B-tree % index. % % \begin{subquestion}{6} % Identify these two parameters and describe what each parameter % specifies. Use diagrams to illustrate your answer. % \begin{marking} % \emph{Node size} [1] specifies the maximum number of pointers in % each index node [1]. Suitable diagram [1]. % % \emph{Percentage fill} [1] specifies the number of pointers in each % index node that are allocated when a node is created [1]. In effect, % it determines the amount of free space left in each node. Suitable % diagram [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{4} % For each of the two parameters, discuss the practical effect(s) of: % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % high values of the parameter; and % \begin{marking} % Large node size reduces the height of the B-tree, resulting in % potentially fewer I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. It % can however increase the number of rows locked in a single leaf % node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % % High percent fill means that most pointers in a node will be % allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves % little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values % that change [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % low values of the parameter. % \begin{marking} % Small node size increases the height of the B-tree, resulting in % potentially more I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. The % number of rows locked in a single leaf node will be reduced % [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % % Low percent fill means that most pointers in a node will not be % allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves % little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values % that change [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % % % \begin{question}{5}\label{clusterq} % % \begin{subquestion}{2} % Define what is meant by the term ``clustering'' in the context of % physical database design and tuning, and explain why it is beneficial. % % \begin{marking} % Clustering is the grouping of related rows physically near to each % other on disk [1] so that they may be retrieved in as few I/Os as % possible (ideally one)---beneficial because of the slowness of disk % I/O compared to memory I/O [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{3}\label{clusterqcode} % Consider the following Oracle8 SQL table definition: % % \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{} % create table enrolment % ( student_id char(7), % paper_code char(7), % enrol_year number(4), % % primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year) % ); % \end{lstlisting} % % The \textsf{Enrolment} table is often queried for all rows relating to % a particular student in a particular year (for example, student % 1234567 in 1998, student 9876543 in 2000, etc.). Write appropriate % Oracle8 SQL code that will cluster the rows of the table in such a way % as to support these types of query (you do not need to calculate % cluster sizes). Relevant Oracle8 syntax diagrams are given on the next % page. % \begin{marking} % \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{} % create cluster enrolment_cluster (student_id char(7), year number(4)); % % create index enrol_cluster_index on cluster enrolment_cluster; % % create table enrolment % ( student_id char(7), % paper_code char(7), % enrol_year number(4), % % primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year) % ) cluster enrolment_cluster(student_id, enrol_year); % \end{lstlisting} % \end{marking} % [1] each for correct cluster, cluster index and table clustering. % \end{subquestion} % % \end{question} % % \end{examsection} % . % . % . % \end{document} % \end{verbatim} % \normalsize % % \begin{figure} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-1}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-2}} % % \begin{center} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-3}} % \end{center} % % \caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam}.} % \label{Fig.Example} % \end{figure} % % \begin{figure} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-2}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-3}} % % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-4}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-5}} % % \caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam} when % \textsf{markingschedule} is used.} % \label{Fig.Example2} % \end{figure} % % % \StopEventually{} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS Revamped and tided up documentation and code.} % % \section{The code} % % \subsection{Preamble} % % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01] \ProvidesClass{ouexam}[\ouexamshortdate\space % v\ouexamversion\space Otago % University examination paper] % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\@unsupported} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS New \cs{@unsupported} macro.} % This macro is used to handle documents written for older versions of % \textsf{ouexam}. All obsolete macros map to this macro, which prints out an % appropriate error message. It needs to be defined early because it is used % to trap use of the obsolete \textsf{multichoice} class option. % % \begin{macrocode} \def\@unsupported#1{\ClassError{ouexam}{INCOMPATIBLE (#1): this % document was written for an earlier version of ouexam and is % not compatible with ouexam v\ouexamversion\space Please use ouexam % v1.2 or earlier to process this document. Version 1.2 can be % downloaded from the same location as version\space\ouexamversion}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{multichoice} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \textsf{multichoice} class option.} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/04}{NJS Removed support for \textsf{multichoice} option.} % The \textsf{multichoice} class option is no longer supported, but rather than % just breaking older documents, we can at least try to present a reasonable % error message. % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{multichoice}{% \OptionNotUsed\@unsupported{multichoice class option} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{twoside} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Turned off \textsf{twoside} option.} % This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of % the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The \textsf{twoside} option does % not really make sense, however---all Otago examination papers are printed % single-sided anyway, and the format is such that two-sided printing would % look no different. The \textsf{twoside} option is therefore not used in this % class. % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{draft} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New \textsf{draft} class option.} % \begin{macro}{\if@draft} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New switch for \textsf{draft}.} % The \textsf{draft} option determines whether the examination is to be printed % in draft mode (default off). The \cs{if@draft} switch is used to determine % whether this is in effect (default false). Draft mode has the usual effects % that you would expect for draft mode in the \textsf{article} class, plus % \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in the header of every page. % % \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@draft \@draftfalse \DeclareOption{draft}{\@drafttrue} % does this need to be passed to the article class? % \end{macrocode} % % Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} package and turn on the % \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all included graphics will % be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the \|draft=false\| option to the % \cs{includegraphics} macro. The amount of effort required to fix what is % a relatively small issue isn't really worth it, so this will not change. % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{markingschedule} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New \textsf{markingschedule} class option.} % \begin{macro}{\if@markingschedule} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New switch for \textsf{markingschedule}.} % The \textsf{markingschedule} option determines whether marking schedule % information is printed in addition to the questions (default off). The % \cs{if@markingschedule} switch is used to determine whether this is in effect % (default false). % % \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@markingschedule \@markingschedulefalse \DeclareOption{markingschedule}{\@markingscheduletrue} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % All other options are passed directly to the \textsf{article} class: % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} \ProcessOptions % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Changed default point size to 12pt.} % The defaults for this class are \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, % \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. The font size is the only one that might % need to change. % % \begin{macrocode} \LoadClass[onecolumn,oneside,a4paper,12pt]{article} % \end{macrocode} % % % \subsection{Required packages} % % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/08}{NJS Removed requirement for \textsf{calc} and % \textsf{ifthen} packages.} % The only required package is the \textsf{verbatim} package, which is used % to implement the \textsf{marking} environment: % % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{verbatim} % \end{macrocode} % % % \subsection{Page setup} % % \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin} % \begin{macro}{\topmargin} % \begin{macro}{\textwidth} % \begin{macro}{\textheight} % A4 paper is assumed (since this class is intended only for Otago examination % papers, this seems a reasonable assumption). The margins are top and bottom % 2cm, left and right 2.54cm (1in). % % \begin{macrocode} \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0cm} \setlength{\topmargin}{-0.54cm} \setlength{\textwidth}{15.92cm} \setlength{\textheight}{25.7cm} \advance\textheight by-\headheight \advance\textheight by-\headsep \advance\textheight by-\footskip % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Page styles}\label{pagestyles} % % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS Added support to page styles for \textsf{draft} % and \textsf{markingschedule} class options.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/15}{NJS Fixed headers so that the page number is always % centered.} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@plain} % The \textsf{plain} page style is based on that in the \textsf{article} class, % and produces pages with the page number centered at the top, the paper number % in the top right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom % right. If semester information is specified, this is included in parentheses % after the paper code, for example, ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)''. % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@plain{% \def\@oddhead{% % \end{macrocode} % Note that we have to get a bit clever to ensure that the page number is % properly centered in the page header. The naive solution is just to use % \cs{hfill}s, but this will cause the page number to shift around depending on % the length of \cs{@pnumber}. Piet van Oostrum's \textsf{fancyhdr} package will % do this for us, but it seems a bit of overkill to require this package merely % so that we can ensure that the page number remains centered. Instead, we've % borrowed the relevant technique from that class, which draws the left, centre % and right bits of the header as three overlapping boxes. You just have to be % careful that the value of \cs{@pnumber} isn't so long that it overwrites the % page number. % \begin{macrocode} \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}} \let\@evenhead\@oddhead \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}} \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \textsf{plain} is the default page style: % \begin{macrocode} \pagestyle{plain} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@lastpage} % The \textsf{lastpage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without the % ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@lastpage{% \def\@oddhead{% \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}} \let\@evenhead\@oddhead \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule} \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \textsf{lastpage} should be automatically applied to the last page of the % document: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{\thispagestyle{lastpage}} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage} % The \textsf{titlepage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without % the header. % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@titlepage{% \def\@oddhead{\@draft}% \let\@evenhead\@oddhead% \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}% \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot% } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Various counters} % % Earlier versions of \textsf{ouexam} used the \textsf{enumerate} % environment to build questions, which meant that special counters were not % required. This version of the class, however, uses a different mechanism for % building questions, so we need to define custom counters for several things. % % \begin{macro}{question} % \begin{macro}{subquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subquestion} counter.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question number from % \cs{labelsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(a)'' % instead of ``1(a)''.} % \begin{macro}{subsubquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubquestion} counter.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS The \texttt{subsubquestion} was incorrectly % printing as ``(a)'' rather than ``(i)''. Fixed.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question numbers from % \cs{labelsubsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(i)'' % instead of ``1(a)(i)''.} % First, we define three counters for the three possible levels of question: % top-level question, second-level sub-question or third-level sub-sub-question: % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{question} \newcounter{subquestion}[question] \newcounter{subsubquestion}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % The three question levels are numbered as 1., (a) and (i) respectively, so we % also need to redefine the associated \cs{the} and \cs{label} macros % appropriately: % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand{\thequestion}{\arabic{question}} \newcommand{\labelquestion}{\arabic{question}.} \renewcommand{\thesubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})} \newcommand{\labelsubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})} \renewcommand{\thesubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})} \newcommand{\labelsubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{examexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examexpected} counter.} % The \|examexpected\| counter stores the total expected number of marks for the % examination, and defaults to 100: % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{examexpected} \setcounter{examexpected}{100} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{examoutof} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examoutof} macro.} % To specify that an examination is out of some number of marks other than % 100, use the \cs{examoutof} macro to set the value: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\examoutof}[1]{\setcounter{examexpected}{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{sectexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{sectexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{qexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \cs{qexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subqexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subsubqexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubqexpected} counter.} % The next four counters perform the same function as the \|examexpected\| counter % for sections, questions, sub-questions and sub-sub-questions respectively. No % macros are required to set these values as they are set automatically by the % question-building environments. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{sectexpected} \newcounter{qexpected} \newcounter{subqexpected} \newcounter{subsubqexpected} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{lastexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{lastexpected} counter.} % The \|lastexpected\| counter records the expected marks total for the last % question. This will eventually be used to verify that the marks total for a % marking schedule equals the marks total for the corresponding question, but % this hasn't been implemented yet. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{lastexpected} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{examrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{sectrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \texttt{sectrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{qrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{qrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subqrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqrunning} counter.} % These four counters keep track of the running total of marks for the % current examination, section, question and subquestion respectively. This % is later compared against the corresponding expected total. A running total % is not needed for sub-sub-questions because they do not have sub-parts. The % \|qrunning\| and \|subqrunning\| counters are reset when the associated % question counters are incremented. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{examrunning} \setcounter{examrunning}{0} \newcounter{sectrunning} \newcounter{qrunning}[question] \newcounter{subqrunning}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{hassubs} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubs} counter.} % \begin{macro}{hassubsubs} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubsubs} counter.} % These two counters are used to track whether questions and % sub-questions have sub-parts. Counters are used rather than booleans because % counters are set globally and booleans are not (or at least do not appear to % be). Both counters reset when the associated question counters are % incremented. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{hassubs}[question] \newcounter{hassubsubs}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % At the end of the document, check that the running total of marks for the % examination matches what we were expecting: % % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \ifnum\theexamexpected=\theexamrunning \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual number of marks for exam % (\theexamrunning) does not match expected number of marks % (\theexamexpected)} \fi } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{xsection} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/29}{NJS New \texttt{xsection} counter.} % Finally, we set up a counter for the section ``number'' and define it so % that it prints out as an upper case letter rather than a number. We could % just redefine the \|section\| counter, but that interferes with the section % numbering in the documentation, and we can't have that, can we? \|:)\| % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{xsection} \setcounter{xsection}{0} \renewcommand{\thexsection}{\Alph{xsection}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Question-building environments and associated items} % % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{question} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct % placement of marks in output.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Total marks for a question are now printed only % if the question has no sub-questions.} % \begin{environment}{question} % The \textsf{question} environment specifies a top-level question, and produces % questions numbered in the form ``1.'', ``2.'', etc. It has one mandatory % argument, the number of marks allocated to the question, which is used to % initialise the \|qexpected\| counter\footnote{If it were not for the fact that % you can only refer to environment arguments in the environment preamble, the % \texttt{qexpected} counter would be unnecessary.}. If the argument is left % empty, default to zero for the number of marks: % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{question}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{qexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{qexpected}{#1}\fi % \end{macrocode} % % For each top-level question, we increment the \|question\| counter, which also % resets the \|hassubs\| and \|qrunning\| counters to zero: % \begin{macrocode} \refstepcounter{question} % \end{macrocode} % The question itself is built using a single-item \textsf{list} environment. % \begin{macrocode} \begin{list}{\labelquestion}{} \item % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, the following things happen: % \begin{enumerate} % \item If the question has no sub-questions, the value of the \|qexpected\| % counter is added to \|examrunning\| and \|sectrunning\|, and both \|qrunning\| % and \|lastexpected\| are set to the value of \|qexpected\|. % % \begin{macrocode} }{% \ifnum\thehassubs=0 \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{qexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{qexpected}} \setcounter{qrunning}{\value{qexpected}} % \end{macrocode} % % The total number of marks for the question is then printed right-justified % on the line as ``(\emph{m} marks)'' where \emph{m} is the value of the % \|qrunning\| counter. The environment determines whether to print ``mark'' or % ``marks'' automatically, and figures out whether the number of marks will fit % on the last line of the question or needs to be placed on the next line. % The code for handling the line breaking is derived from an example on page % 106 of \emph{The \TeX{}book}: % % \begin{macrocode} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\theqrunning~\ifnum\theqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par % \end{macrocode} % % \item If the question \emph{does} have sub-questions, then \|qrunning\|, % \|examrunning\| and \|sectrunning\| have already been set by the various % sub-environments. The value of \|qrunning\| is then compared with % \|qexpected\|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number % of marks for the question is \emph{not} printed in this case. % % \begin{macrocode} \else \ifnum\theqrunning=\theqexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\theqrunning) for % question \thequestion\space doesn't match expected mark % (\theqexpected)} \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} % % \item \|lastexpected\| is set to the value of \|qexpected\| so it can be used % in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment. % % \begin{macrocode} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{qexpected}} \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % % \end{enumerate} % \end{environment} % % \begin{environment}{subquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subquestion} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement % of marks in output.} % The \textsf{subquestion} environment is the analogue of \textsf{question} for % sub-questions. On initialisation, it sets \|subqexpected\| to the value of the % mandatory argument (defaulting to zero if the argument is empty), increments % the \|hassubs\| counter so that the enclosing \textsf{question} environment can % react appropriately, increments \|subquestion\| (thus resetting \|hassubsubs\| and % \|subqrunning\| to zero) and opens a single-item list with numbering of the form % ``(a)'', ``(b)'', etc. % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{subquestion}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subqexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}\fi \setcounter{subqexpected}{#1} \addtocounter{hassubs}{1} \refstepcounter{subquestion} \begin{list}{\labelsubquestion}{} \item }{% % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, if performs similar checks to the % \textsf{question} environment. If the sub-question has no sub-sub-questions, % the value of \|subqexpected\| is added to \|qrunning\| and \|sectrunning\|: % % \begin{macrocode} \ifnum\thehassubsubs=0 \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \setcounter{subqrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} % \end{macrocode} % Then the number of marks for the sub-question are typeset in a similar manner % to the \textsf{question} environment: % \begin{macrocode} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\thesubqrunning~\ifnum\thesubqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par % \end{macrocode} % % If the sub-question \emph{does} have sub-sub-questions, check the running total % against the expected number and raise an error if they don't match. % \begin{macrocode} \else \ifnum\thesubqrunning=\thesubqexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesubqrunning) for % question \thesubquestion\space doesn't match expected mark % (\thesubqexpected)} \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} % Finally, set \|lastexpected\| to the value of \|qexpected\| so it can be used % in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment. % \begin{macrocode} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subqexpected}} \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{environment} % % \begin{environment}{subsubquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subsubquestion} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement % of marks in output.} % This is similar to both \textsf{question} and \textsf{subquestion}, and % generates an appropriately numbered sub-sub-question (``(i)'', ``(ii)'', etc.). % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{subsubquestion}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{#1}\fi % \end{macrocode} % Increment \|hassubsubs\| so that the enclosing \textsf{subquestion} environment % can react appropriately: % \begin{macrocode} \addtocounter{hassubsubs}{1} \refstepcounter{subsubquestion} \begin{list}{\labelsubsubquestion}{} \item }{% % \end{macrocode} % % Closing this environment is a bit simpler than the previous two because we % don't need to check whether the sub-sub-question has any sub-components (this % never happens). All we have to do is set the appropriate counters and typeset % the number of marks. % % \begin{macrocode} \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{subqrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\thesubsubqexpected~\ifnum\thesubsubqexpected=1 mark \else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{environment} % % Note that none of these three environments check whether they are correctly % nested (i.e., \textsf{subsubquestion} within \textsf{subquestion} within % \textsf{question}). % % % \subsection{Draft examination printing} % % \begin{macro}{\@marking} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS New \cs{@draft} macro.} % Specifying the \textsf{draft} option causes \textsf{ouexam} to print % \fbox{DRAFT} in large letters in the header of every page. This is drawn by % the \cs{@draft} macro, which is included in the page header definition of % all the page styles for this class (see % \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref{pagestyles}}). \textbf{Note:} Because % the \cs{@draft} macro is included in the page header, it will usually % overflow the page boundaries, causing ``\|Overfull \vbox\|'' warnings. Note % the extra set of braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}. % % \begin{macrocode} \if@draft\def\@draft{{\Huge\fbox{DRAFT}}} \else\let\@draft\@empty \fi % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Marking schedule information} % % \begin{environment}{marking} % \begin{macro}{\@markingschedule} % \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New \textsf{marking} environment for including % answers and/or marking schedule information.} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS Now prints ``MARKING SCHEDULE'' at the bottom % of every page if the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified.} % The \textsf{marking} environment allows the specification of marking % schedule information in the same location as the questions. If the % \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified, marking schedule % information is printed in italics. In addition, \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} is % printed in large letters in the footer of every page. This is drawn by the % \cs{@markingschedule} macro, which is included in the page footer % definition of all the page styles for this class (see % \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref{pagestyles}}). Note the extra set of % braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}. % % \begin{macrocode} \if@markingschedule \newenvironment{marking}{\itshape}{\normalfont} \def\@markingschedule{{\Huge\fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE}}} \else % \end{macrocode} % % Normally \textsf{marking} just maps to the \textsf{comment} environment from % Rainer Sch\"{o}pf's \textsf{verbatim} package, i.e., marking information is not % printed: % % \begin{macrocode} \let\marking\comment \let\endmarking\endcomment \let\@markingschedule\@empty \fi % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % % % \subsection{Section handling} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS new \textsf{examsection} environment.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{@defsecinst} macro.} % \begin{environment}{examsection} % \begin{macro}{\@defsecinst} % The \textsf{examsection} environment specifies a major section of an % examination paper. Sections are sequentially numbered ``A'', ``B'', etc. The % environment has three arguments: % % \begin{enumerate} % \item The expected number of marks for the section. % % \item The instructions for this section. This defaults to ``ANSWER ALL % QUESTIONS.'' if left blank. To change the default text, redefine the % \cs{@defsecinst} macro. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@defsecinst{ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.} % \end{macrocode} % % \item A description of the contents of the section which may be left blank. % \end{enumerate} % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{examsection}[3]{% % \end{macrocode} % Every section begins on a new page. % \begin{macrocode} \newpage % \end{macrocode} % If the argument for the number of marks is left empty, default to zero. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{sectexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{sectexpected}{#1}\fi \refstepcounter{xsection} \setcounter{sectrunning}{0} % \end{macrocode} % The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in % \cs{large} size. % \begin{macrocode} {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] \def\@usersecinst{#2} \ifx\@usersecinst\@empty\@defsecinst\else\@usersecinst\fi\par \def\@usersectopic{#3} \ifx\@usersectopic\@empty\else\par\noindent\@usersectopic\fi \\ }{% % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, the value of \|sectrunning\| is compared against % \|sectexpected\|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number % marks for the section is printed in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL % \emph{m} MARKS]}'' where \emph{m} is the value of \|sectrunning\|. % % \begin{macrocode} \ifnum\thesectrunning=\thesectexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesectrunning) for section % \thexsection\space doesn't match expected mark (\thesectexpected)} \fi \bigskip\hfill\textbf{[SECTION \thexsection\ TOTAL % \thesectrunning\ MARKS]} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % % \begin{macro}{\newsection} % \textbf{[DEPRECATED]} The \cs{newsection} macro generates a new examination % section, appropriately numbered. The optional argument contains instructions % for answering the questions in the new section, and defaults to ``ANSWER ALL % QUESTIONS''. This macro is included only for backwards compatibility with % previous versions. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro % and should be used in new documents. This macro will eventually be deleted. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\newsection}[1][ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.]{% \ClassWarning{ouexam}{DEPRECATED: The \protect\newsection\space % macro is deprecated; use the examsection environment instead} % \end{macrocode} % Every section begins on a new page. % \begin{macrocode} \newpage \refstepcounter{xsection} % \end{macrocode} % The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in % \cs{large} size. Note that sections are ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots. % \begin{macrocode} {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] #1 } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Title page generation} % % \begin{macro}{\examyear} % \begin{macro}{\@year} % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't % know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.} % The \cs{examyear} macro specifies the year in which the examination is being % held. It redefines the \cs{@year} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\examyear}[1]{\def\@year{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % This macro is required: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@year{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\examyear\space was specified}\@eha } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\department} % \begin{macro}{\@dept} % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't % know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.} % The \cs{department} macro specifies the name of the department, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@dept} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\department}[1]{\def\@dept{#1}} \def\@dept{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\department\space was specified}\@eha } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\papernumber} % \begin{macro}{\@pnumber} % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't % know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.} % The \cs{papernumber} macro specifies the paper number, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@pnumber} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\papernumber}[1]{\def\@pnumber{#1}} \def\@pnumber{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papernumber\space was specified}\@eha } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\papertitle} % \begin{macro}{\@ptitle} % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't % know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.} % The \cs{papertitle} macro specifies the title of the paper, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@ptitle} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\papertitle}[1]{\def\@ptitle{#1}} \def\@ptitle{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papertitle\space was specified}\@eha } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\semester} % \begin{macro}{\@semester} % \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added full-year support to \cs{semester}.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/14}{NJS Rewrote \cs{semester} to support summer school % and special exams.} % The \cs{semester} macro specifies which semester the examination is for. % Legal values for the argument are ``1'', ``2'', ``SS'' for summer school, % ``FY'' for full-year or ``SP'' for a special examination---anything else is % ignored. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@ONE{1} \def\@TWO{2} \def\@SS{SS} \def\@FY{FY} \def\@SP{SP} % \end{macrocode} % This macro redefines the \cs{@semester} macro which is used in % \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\semester}[1]{% \def\@sem{#1} \ifx\@sem\@ONE\def\@semester{Semester One} \else\ifx\@sem\@TWO\def\@semester{Semester Two} \else\ifx\@sem\@SS\def\@semester{Summer School} \else\ifx\@sem\@FY\def\@semester{Full Year} \else\ifx\@sem\@SP\def\@semester{Special Examination} \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{invalid value `#1' for % \protect\semester; valid values are `1', `2', `SS', % `FY' and `SP'. No semester information will be printed} \fi\fi\fi\fi } % \end{macrocode} % \cs{semester} is optional---if you omit it or give it an invalid argument, % \cs{@semester} remains empty. % \begin{macrocode} \let\@semester\@empty % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\timeallowed} % \begin{macro}{\@hours} % The \cs{timeallowed} macro specifies the length of the examination in hours. % It redefines the \cs{@hours} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\timeallowed}[1]{\def\@hours{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{timeallowed} is optional---if you omit it, \cs{@hours} defaults to ``3'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\@hours{3} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{num.pages} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed label from \cs{page.last}.} % There is no macro to specify the number of pages in the examination because % it is done automatically by inserting a \cs{newlabel} that refers to the last % page directly into the \|.aux\| file: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{num.pages}{{}{\thepage}}} } % \end{macrocode} % This label is then referenced in \cs{@maketitlepage}. % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{num.questions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \cs{num.questions} label representing the % number of questions.} % Similarly, there is no macro to specify the number of questions in the % examination. This is calculated using the same method as for the number of % pages: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \immediate\write\@auxout{% \string\newlabel{num.questions}{{}{\thequestion}} } } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\instructions} % \begin{macro}{\@instructions} % The \cs{instructions} macro specifies instructions on how candidates should % answer questions. It redefines the \cs{@instructions} macro that is used in % \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@instructions{Answer \underline{ALL} questions.} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{instructions} is optional. If you omit it, \cs{@instructions} defaults % to ``Answer \underline{ALL} questions.'' % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\instructions}[1]{\def\@instructions{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\material} % \begin{macro}{\@material} % The \cs{material} macro lets specifies any additional material that candidates % are provided in addition to the examination paper itself, and is optional. % It redefines the \cs{@material} macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@material\@empty \newcommand{\material}[1]{\def\@material{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\allowcalculators} % \begin{macro}{\@calculators} % The \cs{allowcalculators} macro specifies whether or not calculators are % allowed in the examination. If \cs{allowcalculators} is omitted, \cs{@calculators} % defaults to ``may not'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\@calculators{may not} % \end{macrocode} % Issuing an \cs{allowcalculators} changes the redefines \cs{@calculators} to % ``may'': % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\allowcalculators}{\def\@calculators{may}} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{@calculators} is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}. % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\copiesof} % \begin{macro}{\@copiesof} % The \cs{copiesof} macro specifies any material that candidates are allowed to % bring into the examination, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@copiesof} % macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@copiesof\@empty \newcommand{\copiesof}[1]{\def\@copiesof{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\otherinstructions} % \begin{macro}{\@otherinst} % The \cs{otherinstructions} macro specifies any other instructions not covered % by any of the above, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@otherinst} % macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@otherinst\@empty \newcommand{\otherinstructions}[1]{\def\@otherinst{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\maketitlepage} % The \cs{maketitlepage} macro is the \textsf{ouexam} analogue of \cs{maketitle}. % It takes all of the information provided by the above macros and generates a % properly formatted examination title page. If you want to design your own title % page styles, redefine \cs{@maketitlepage} (this is not normally recommended % however). % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\maketitlepage}{\@maketitlepage} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@maketitlepage} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed macro from \cs{maketitlepage}.} % The \cs{@maketitlepage} macro generates an examination title page that % meets the Otago University requirements for final examination papers. You % can redefine this if you want to change the format, but normally you would % not do this. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@maketitlepage{% \thispagestyle{titlepage} % \end{macrocode} % The header information for the examination is printed centered at the top % of the page. The department, paper number and paper title (and the semester % information if required) are placed inside a double box. % \begin{macrocode} \begin{center} {\Large \textbf{UNIVERSITY OF OTAGO EXAMINATIONS \@year}} \\[\baselineskip] \fbox{\framebox[\linewidth]{% \begin{tabular}{c} \\ {\large \@dept} \\ \\ {\large Paper \@pnumber} \\ \\ {\large \@ptitle} \\ \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\@semester \\ \fi \\ \end{tabular}% }} \mbox{}\\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Next, the time allowed for completing the examination: % \begin{macrocode} \textbf{(TIME ALLOWED: \@hours\ HOURS)} \\[\baselineskip] \end{center} % \end{macrocode} % The number of pages is automatically calculated, as described earlier. All we % need to do is reference the \|num.pages\| label that we put into the \|.aux\| % file: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{This examination paper comprises \pageref{num.pages} pages.} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out the instructions for answering questions: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Candidates should answer questions as follows:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@instructions\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out any provided material: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{The following material is provided:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@material\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out use of calculators section: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Use of calculators:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm} Electronic calculators \@calculators\ be used in this examination. \\[\baselineskip] Please note: where the use of calculators is permitted, these must be non-pro\-gram\-ma\-ble, hand-held calculators without alphabetic key pads. \end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.) \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out anything that candidates are allowed to bring: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Candidates are permitted copies of:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@copiesof\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.) \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out other instructions, and finish. % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Other Instructions:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@otherinst\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \newpage } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Obsolete macros and environments} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS All \textsf{multichoice} macros and environments % made obsolete.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \cs{markingschedule}, \cs{marks}, \cs{totalmarks} % macros made obsolete.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions}, % \textsf{subsubquestions} environments made obsolete.} % The following macros and environments are no longer supported as of version % 2.0. Documents that use these macros can be processed using ouexam v1.2 or % earlier. The obsolete multiple-choice examination support is dealt with % during option processing, so we can ignore the obsolete multiple-choice % macros. % % \begin{environment}{questions} % \begin{environment}{subquestions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is % active.} % \begin{environment}{subsubquestions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is % active.} % \begin{macro}{markingschedule} % \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New macro to turn marking information on and % off.} % The \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions} and \textsf{subsubquestions} % environments have been replaced by the \textsf{question}, % \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion} environments respectively. % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{questions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{questions environment}}}{} \newenvironment{subquestions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{subquestions environment}}}{} \newenvironment{subsubquestions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{subsubquestions environment}}}{} % \end{macrocode} % The \cs{markingschedule} macro has been replaced by the % \textsf{markingschedule} class option. We can't map this to the % \cs{@unsupported} macro because \cs{markingschedule} occurs in the document % preamble. Mapping it to \cs{@unsupported} causes \TeX\ to blow up for some % reason. It's safe enough to ignore it. % \begin{macrocode} \let\markingschedule\@empty % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % \end{environment} % \end{environment} % % \begin{macro}{\marks} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS This macro now increments the \texttt{marks} % counter.} % \begin{macro}{\totalmarks} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Removed the parameter for the number of marks; % Both these macros have been replaced by automatic calculations within the % question-building environments.} % The \cs{marks} macro has been replaced by the argument to the various % question-building environments. The \cs{totalmarks} macro has been replaced % by automatic calculations within these environments. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\marks}[1]{\@unsupported{marks macro}} \newcommand{\totalmarks}{\@unsupported{totalmarks macro}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % % % \Finale % % \PrintChanges \def\filedate{30 January 2002} \def\fileversion{2.0.1} \def\shortdate{2002/04/30} % \iffalse meta-comment %% %% ouexam.dtx Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago %% %% You may use this package freely, and also distribute it %% provided that you don't change it, make any money off %% it or pretend that you wrote it. %% %<driver> \documentclass{ltxdoc} \usepackage{doc} \DisableCrossrefs \CodelineNumbered \RecordChanges \usepackage{graphicx} % change hyperref options as required \usepackage[dvips,colorlinks,pdfpagemode=None,a4paper,urlcolor=blue, linkcolor=red,pdfauthor={Nigel Stanger}]{hyperref} \title{The \textsf{ouexam} document class, v\fileversion} \author{Nigel Stanger\\nstanger@infoscience.otago.ac.nz} \date{\filedate} \begin{document} \maketitle \DocInput{ouexam.dtx} \end{document} %</driver> % % \fi % %% \CheckSum{760} %% %% \CharacterTable %% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z %% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z %% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9 %% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \# %% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \& %% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \) %% Asterisk \ Plus \+ Comma \, %% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/ %% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \< %% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \? %% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\ %% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_ %% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \\| %% Right brace \} Tilde \~} %% % % \MakeShortVerb{\\|} % % \changes{1.0}{1999/04/15}{Initial version.} % % \begin{abstract} % This document class allows you to create Otago University final % examination papers using \LaTeXe\@. It implements the major formatting % requirements specified by the University, provides useful % macros to ease the process of building the title page and automatically % deals with fiddly little issues such as question and section numbering, % the number of pages in the paper, printing ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the % bottom right corner of every page except the last one and ensuring that the % total number of marks for a question adds up to the expected number. % \end{abstract} % % % \tableofcontents % % % \section{Overview} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/11}{NJS Added note on backwards compatibility.} % \subsection{Important note on backwards compatibility} % % Version 2.0 of \textsf{ouexam} introduces several major changes from earlier % versions. Consequently, documents created using an earlier version of % \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{incompatible} with version 2.0 or later. Versions 2.0 % and greater of \textsf{ouexam} will detect attempts to process version 1.x % document and display an error message. % % The older version (1.2) is still available and can be downloaded from the same % location as the current version. To process older version documents, just copy % the version 1.2 \|ouexam.cls\| file into the same directory as the document file. % \TeX\ searches the current directory first, so this copy will take precedence % over any other installed version of \textsf{ouexam}. % % % \subsection{Class options} % % This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of % the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The default options are % \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. % Normally the only one you might want to change is the last one. % In addition, \textsf{ouexam} accepts the following ``native'' class options: % \begin{description} % \item[\textsf{draft}] \DescribeMacro{draft} This option has the usual % effects that you would expect for \textsf{draft} mode in the % \textsf{article} class, plus \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in % the header of every page. Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} % package and turn on the \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all % included graphics will be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the % \|draft=false\| option to \cs{includegraphics}. % % \item[\textsf{markingschedule}] \DescribeMacro{markingschedule} This option % Rather than write a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, you % can use the \textsf{marking} environment to embed marking information % within questions (see % \hyperref[Sec:Questions:Marking]{section~\ref{Sec:Questions:Marking}}). % By default this information is not printed (for obvious reasons!), but % when it comes time to print a marking schedule for the examination, % including the \textsf{markingschedule} class option in the % \cs{usepackage} command will cause \textsf{ouexam} to print the hidden % content. It will also print \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} in the footer of % every page. % \end{description} % % % \subsection{Required packages} % % This class requires the \textsf{verbatim} package in order to implement % the marking schedule functionality. % % % \subsection{Page margins} % % This class assumes A4 paper. You will probably get weird results if you try % to do anything different. The margins are set up as follows: top and bottom % 2cm (headers and footers are inside this margin), left and right 2.54cm (1in). % % % \subsection{Page styles} % % There are three page styles defined in this class: % \begin{description} % \item[\textsf{plain}] \DescribeMacro{plain} This is a slight modification % of the \textsf{plain} page style from \textsf{article}. It produces pages % that have the page number centered at the top, the paper number in the top % right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom right. This % is the default page style. % % \item[\textsf{lastpage}] \DescribeMacro{lastpage} This is similar to % \textsf{plain} but without the ``\textbf{TURN OVER}''. It is used for the % last page of the examination. You normally will not have to use this % yourself---the class should take care of it automatically. The class does % however occasionally seem to get confused, so there may times when you have % to set the page style of the last page manually. It will be fairly obvious % when you need to do this---the usual effect is that the last page % has``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' printed on it when it should not. % % \item[\textsf{titlepage}] \DescribeMacro{titlepage} This is similar to % \textsf{plain} but without the page header, and is used for the title page % of the paper. As with \textsf{lastpage}, you will normally not use this % yourself, because the \cs{maketitlepage} macro handles this automatically % (see \hyperref[Sec:TitlePage]{section~\ref{Sec:TitlePage}}). % \end{description} % % % \section{Writing an examination paper} % % % \subsection{Sections} % \label{Sec:Sections} % % Examination papers may have multiple sections, ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots. % Rather than redefine the existing section macros, this class defines an % \DescribeEnv{examsection} \textsf{examsection} environment\footnote{Note that % the old \cs{newsection} macro has been retained for backwards compatibility % with earlier development versions of \textsf{ouexam}. The \textsf{examsection} % environment replaces this macro and should be used in all new documents.} that % generates a new section. The \textsf{examsection} environment has three % mandatory arguments: % \begin{enumerate} % \item The expected number of marks for the question. If you leave this % argument empty it defaults to zero. \textsf{ouexam} keeps a running total % of the \emph{actual} number of marks encountered within a section, which is % compared with the value of this argument when the environment is closed. % An error is raised if the values are not equal. The running total is also % typeset right-justified in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 20 MARKS]}'' % as an additional verification. % % % \item Instructions for answering questions in this section (such as % ``Answer any TWO questions.''). If you leave this argument empty it % defaults to ``ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.''. % % \item A description of the topic of the section. This can be left % empty. % \end{enumerate} % Every section begins on a new page, and the section title is formatted as % ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in \cs{large} size. For example: \\ % % \noindent\|\begin{examsection}{25}{}{These questions are remarkably boring.}\| \\ % \hspace{1cm}\vdots \\ % \|\end{examsection}\| \\ % % \noindent will produce the following (assuming that the actual number of % marks in the question is correct): % % \begin{center} % \fbox{% % \begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth} % {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~A}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] % ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS. \\ % These questions are remarkably boring. \\ % \hspace{2cm}\vdots \\ % \mbox{}\hfill\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 25 MARKS]} % \end{minipage} % } % \end{center} % % % \subsection{Questions} % \label{Sec:Questions} % % \textsf{ouexam} provides three environments for building examination % questions: \DescribeEnv{question} \textsf{question}, % \DescribeEnv{subquestion} \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion}, % which correspond to top-level questions, parts of questions, and % \DescribeEnv{subsubquestion} sub-parts of questions respectively. They % produce questions that are numbered according to University examination % formatting requirements. Note that questions are normally numbered % sequentially throughout the entire paper regardless of any section % boundaries. % % All three environments have a single mandatory argument which is the % expected number of marks for the question, part or sub-part. If this % argument is left empty it will default to zero. This argument works in much % the same way as the first argument to the \textsf{examsection} environment % (see \hyperref[Sec:Sections]{section~\ref{Sec:Sections}}): \textsf{ouexam} % keeps a running total of the number of marks encountered within each % question part and sub-part, and compares this total with the expected value % when the environment closes. Where appropriate, the running total is % typeset right-justified in the form ``(5 marks)''. For example: % \begin{verbatim} % \begin{question}{5} % \begin{subquestion}{2} % Why is the sky blue? % \end{subquestion} % \begin{subquestion}{3} % Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % \begin{question}{1} % Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. % \end{question} % \end{verbatim} % % \newpage\noindent will produce the following: % \begin{center} % \fbox{% % \begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth} % \begin{enumerate} % \item % \begin{enumerate} % \item Why is the sky blue? \hfill (2 marks) % % \item Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. \hfill (3 % marks) % \end{enumerate} % % \item Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. \hfill (1 % mark) % \end{enumerate} % \end{minipage} % } % \end{center} % % The \textsf{question} environments handle formatting of marks totals % automatically, including considerations such as: % \begin{itemize} % \item whether or not to print the number of marks for a question at all % (they should not be printed if the question has sub-parts); % % \item whether to print ``mark'' or ``marks'' (e.g., question 2 above); and % % \item where to position the number of marks relative to the question, % depending on how full the last line of the question is. % \end{itemize} % % % \subsection{Marking schedule information} % \label{Sec:Questions:Marking} % % Rather than writing a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, % you can use the \DescribeEnv{marking} \textsf{marking} environment to embed % marking information within questions. By default this information is not % printed (for obvious reasons!), but when it comes time to print a marking % schedule for the examination, use the \textsf{markingschedule} class option % to print the hidden content. The marking information will be printed in % \emph{italics} to differentiate it from the main body of the examination, % and \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} will also be printed in the footer of every % page. % % % \subsection{The title page} % \label{Sec:TitlePage} % % This class defines a collection of macros that let you fill in the various % parts of the examination title page. This is analogous to the process you use % to generate the title of a document in, for example, the \textsf{article} class % (using \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{date} and \cs{maketitle}). That is, you % issue the macros described below in the document preamble, then issue a % \cs{maketitlepage} in the document body. % % The \DescribeMacro{\examyear} \cs{examyear} macro lets you specify the year % in which the examination is being held, for example, \|\examyear{1999}\|. This % macro is mandatory. % % The \DescribeMacro{\department} \cs{department} macro lets you specify the % name of the department that produced the examination paper, for example, % \|\department{Information\| \|Science}\|. This macro is mandatory. % % The \DescribeMacro{\papernumber} \cs{papernumber} macro lets you specify the % paper number that the examination is for, for example, % \|\papernumber{COMP 101}\|. This macro is mandatory. \textbf{Warning:} Do not make % the paper number string too long or it will overlap the page number. Be % particularly careful when you specify semester information using \cs{semester}, % because this is appended to the paper number in the page header. For example, % if you specify \|\papernumber{COMP 101}\| and \|\semester{2}\|, the header will % contain ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)'' rather than just ``COMP 101''. The worst % case you will need to consider in such situations is a special examination, % which inserts the text ``(Special Examination)'' after the paper number. % % The \DescribeMacro{\papertitle} \cs{papertitle} macro lets you specify the % title of the paper, for example, % \|\papertitle{Systems Analysis and Design Methods}\|. This macro is mandatory. % % Some papers are offered in more than one semester. The % \DescribeMacro{\semester} \cs{semester} macro lets you specify which semester % the examination is for. The argument can be either ``1'' or ``2'' for semesters % 1 and 2, ``SS'' for summer school or ``SP'' for a special examination, for % example, \|\semester{2}\|. Invalid values for the argument cause a warning to be % raised. This macro is optional---if you omit it, no semester information is % generated. % % The \DescribeMacro{\timeallowed} \cs{timeallowed} macro lets you specify the % length of the examination in hours, for example, \|\timeallowed{2}\|. This % macro is optional---if you omit it, it defaults to three (3) hours. % % If calculators are allowed in the examination, use the % \DescribeMacro{\allowcalculators} \cs{allowcalculators} macro. This macro is % optional---if you omit it, a sentence is printed saying that calculators % are \emph{not} allowed. % % The \DescribeMacro{\instructions} \cs{instructions} macro lets you specify % instructions on how candidates should complete the % examination, for example, \|\instructions{Answer ALL\| \|questions.}\|. This macro % is optional. Note that the content of the instructions can be just about % anything. It is up to you to control formatting, such as how you want lines % broken, etc. This also true of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and % \cs{otherinstructions} macros described below. % % The \DescribeMacro{\material} \cs{material} macro lets you specify any % additional material that candidates are provided in addition to the % examination paper itself, for example, \|\material{SQL schema definition}\|. % This macro is optional. % % The \DescribeMacro{\copiesof} \cs{copiesof} macro lets you specify any % material that candidates are allowed to bring into the examination, for % example, \|\copiesof{McFadden &\| \|Hoffer, 5th edition}\|. This macro is % optional. % % The \DescribeMacro{\otherinstructions} \cs{otherinstructions} macro lets you % specify any other instructions not covered by any of the above, for example, % \|\otherinstructions{No smoking\| \|allowed.}\|. This macro is optional. % % Once you have specified the content of the title page using the above % macros, you simply issue a \DescribeMacro{\maketitlepage} \cs{maketitlepage} % to generate the front page of the examination (cf. \cs{maketitle}). The title % page generated meets University formatting requirements. % Note that the number of pages in the examination paper is generated % and inserted into the title page automatically---you do not need to specify % it manually. % % % \subsection{Miscellaneous} % % Most examinationss are marked out of 100, and \textsf{ouexam} defaults to % this. However, if you want an examination that is marked out of some other % number, for example, 90 marks, you can specify this using the % \DescribeMacro{\examoutof} \cs{examoutof} macro. Thus, \|\examoutof{90}\| % will set the expected number of marks for the examination to 90. This value % is used by \textsf{ouexam} to verify that the marks for all the questions % add up to the expected number of marks for the examination. % % % \section{Errors and warnings} % % In this section are described the error messages and warning produced by % \textsf{ouexam}, and the reasons why they occur. % % % \subsection{Error messages} % % \noindent\texttt{INCOMPATIBLE (\ldots): this document was written for an % earlier} \\ % \texttt{version of ouexam \ldots} \\ % You are trying to use v2.0 or later of \textsf{ouexam} with a document that % was written for \textsf{ouexam} v1.2 or earlier. Versions 2.0 and later of % \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{fundamentally incompatible} with earlier % versions. The only solutions here are either to revert to \textsf{ouexam} % v1.2 or earlier (you can put a copy of the class file in the same directory % as the document), or rewrite the document to conform to the current version % of \textsf{ouexam}. You should be able to download a copy of v1.2 from the % same location that you found the current version. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{examyear} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{department} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papernumber} was specified} \\ % \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papertitle} was specified} \\ % You have not specified one of these macros. All four of these macros are % mandatory and must be included in the preamble of any \textsf{ouexam} % document. \\ % % % \subsection{Warnings} % % \noindent\texttt{actual number of marks for exam (\ldots) does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{number of marks (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for the whole examination (calculated % by summing the marks for all the questions) is not the same as the expected % total for the examination. Adjust the marks for the questions until the % totals match. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for section \ldots\ does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{mark (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for a particular section (calculated by % summing the marks for all the questions in that section) is not the same as % the expected total for that section. Adjust the marks for the questions in % the section concerned until the totals match. The section number is given % in the warning. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for question \ldots\ does not match % expected} \\ % \texttt{mark (\ldots)} \\ % The actual number of marks supplied for a particular question (calculated % by summing the marks of all its sub-parts) is not the same as the expected % total for that question. Adjust the marks for the sub-parts of the % question until the totals match. The question number is given % in the warning. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{DEPRECATED: The \cs{newsection} macro is deprecated; use % the} \\ % \texttt{examsection environment instead} \\ % The \cs{newsection} macro is a hangover from earlier versions of % \textsf{ouexam}, and has been left in v2.0 for backwards compatibility with % some documents that use it. The entire sectioning mechanism was rewritten % from scratch for v2.0, so this macro is now deprecated and will eventually % disappear. You should use the \textsf{examsection} environment % instead. \\ % % \noindent\texttt{invalid value `\ldots' for \cs{semester}; valid values are % `1', `2', `SS'} \\ % \texttt{and `SP'. No semester information will be printed} \\* % You have given an invalid value as the argument to the \cs{semester} macro. % The allowed values are `1' (semester one), `2' (semester two), `SS' (summer % school) and `SP' (special examination). Any other values will be ignored. % Note that these are case-sensitive, for example, `sp' is invalid. \\ % % % \section{Example} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/25}{NJS Updated example to conform to 2.0 changes.} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Updated example to conform to 1.1 changes.} % The code given below is for the first three pages of the INFO~321 2001 % final examination. The output produced by this source is shown in % \hyperref[Fig.Example]{figure~\ref{Fig.Example} on % page~\pageref{Fig.Example}}. Particular points to note in this example % are: % % \begin{itemize} % % \item The number of hours is not specified, so it defaults to three. % % \item This examination allows calculators. % % \item The \textsf{listings} package is used to typeset code listings. % % \item The argument of the \cs{instructions} macro can be just about % anything, as can the arguments of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and % \cs{otherinstructions} macros. In this example, the \cs{instructions} % macro has been omitted, causing \textsf{ouexam} to output the default % instructions. % % \item Marking schedule information has been embedded within the % questions. \hyperref[Fig.Example2]{Figure~\ref{Fig.Example2} on % page~\pageref{Fig.Example2}} shows the output produced by this source % when the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is used. % % \end{itemize} % % \small % \begin{verbatim} % \documentclass{ouexam} % % \usepackage{graphicx} % \usepackage{listings} % % \examyear{2001} % \department{Information Science} % \papernumber{INFO 321} % \papertitle{Database Systems} % \allowcalculators % % \begin{document} % % \lstloadlanguages{ODL,OQL,[Oracle8]SQL,[Oracle8]PLSQL} % \lstset{basicstyle=\sffamily, stringspaces=false, tabsize=2, % indent=1cm, belowskip=0pt, commentstyle=\itshape, % labelstyle=\scriptsize, labelsep=5pt, labelstep=1,} % % \maketitlepage % % \begin{examsection}{25}{}{Questions in this section (total 25 marks) % relate to physical database design and tuning.} % % % \begin{question}{10} % % A major U.S. mail order firm is having performance problems with queries % on the \textsf{Customer} table in its Oracle8 order-processing database. % Consider the following information about the \textsf{Customer} table, % then answer the questions below: \\ % % \textsf{\textbf{Customer}(\underline{customer\_no}, name, address, city, % state, country, phone, email, status)} % % \begin{itemize} % \item \textsf{customer\_no} is the primary key and because this is an % Oracle8 database, a unique B-tree index has been automatically created % on this column. % % \item \textsf{status} is a single character column that holds one of % the values `I' (inactive), `B' (bronze), `S' (silver) or `G' (gold). % The value of this column is determined by a customer's order history. % % \item About 10\% of customers are inactive, about 50\% have bronze % status, about 35\% have silver status and about 5\% have gold status. % % \item The average row size is about 200 bytes and there are % approximately 5,000,000 rows. % % \item The \textsf{Customer} table is heavily queried (averaging thirty % new queries per minute) by four different groups of employees. Group~1 % queries only inactive customers, group~2 queries only bronze status % customers and groups~3 and~4 both query only silver and gold status % customers. Members of any group may query the table at any time and % queries often overlap. % % \item UPDATE, INSERT and DELETE operations on the table are uncommon. % % \item Very few queries are for individual customers; rather, most % queries are based on various combinations of values from % \textsf{status}, \textsf{city}, \textsf{state} and \textsf{country}. % \end{itemize}\medskip % % \begin{subquestion}{3} % Describe and justify an \emph{index-based} physical tuning solution % that will improve the performance of queries on the \textsf{Customer} % table. (No code is required.) % \begin{marking} % Since queries tend to be on combinations of several low-cardinality % columns [1] and the table is very large [1], the most effective % solution would be to place bitmap indexes on status, city, state and % country [1]. % % B-tree indexes on any of the individual columns would not be ideal % because of their low cardinality. A possible alternative is a % composite B-tree index on all four columns [1 for suggesting this if % appropriate], but this is not ideal and would be much larger than % the four bitmap indexes [1 for this explanation if appropriate]. % Hashing is definitely \emph{not} an option, because very few queries % are exact match. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{7} % \begin{subsubquestion}{5}\label{nonindex} % Assuming that there are two identical fast disks available, describe % and justify two alternative \emph{non index-based} physical tuning % solutions that will improve the performance of queries on the % \textsf{Customer} table. For each solution include details of how % the two disks will be used. (No code is required.) % \begin{marking} % Alternative 1: partition the table across the two disks based on % status (four partitions, one for each status value) [1]. This will % allow simultaneous parallel access to different parts of the table % by the different groups [1]. Since two groups both access silver % and gold customers, it makes sense to put the silver customers on % disk one and the gold customers on disk two. Bronze customers % account for 50\% of the table, so it makes sense to also put them % on disk two (as the gold customers are the smallest group), and % put the inactive customers on disk one with the silver customers. % [1 for any sensible partitioning scheme] % % Alternative 2: replicate the table across both disks (one replica % on each disk) [1]. This will also provide simultaneous parallel % access to the data (hard to tell whether this would be better or % worse than the partitioning above) [1]. % % Note that any solution must be capable of being implemented in % Oracle8. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % Briefly discuss the relative advantages and/or disadvantages of the % two alternative solutions you described in part~(\ref{nonindex}) % above. % \begin{marking} % The partitioning solution given above doesn't really help with the % bronze customer rows---we would need random horizontal % partitioning to really help with this, which Oracle8 doesn't % support. More generally, Oracle8 does not migrate rows into the % correct partition if a customer's status changes, so the data will % need to be reloaded occasionally [1]. % % For replication, we have the usual problem of keeping the replicas % synchronised if they are both read/write. This is somewhat % mitigated by the fact that there are only two copies [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % % \newpage % % \begin{question}{10} % There are two generic parameters that affect the structure of a B-tree % index. % % \begin{subquestion}{6} % Identify these two parameters and describe what each parameter % specifies. Use diagrams to illustrate your answer. % \begin{marking} % \emph{Node size} [1] specifies the maximum number of pointers in % each index node [1]. Suitable diagram [1]. % % \emph{Percentage fill} [1] specifies the number of pointers in each % index node that are allocated when a node is created [1]. In effect, % it determines the amount of free space left in each node. Suitable % diagram [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{4} % For each of the two parameters, discuss the practical effect(s) of: % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % high values of the parameter; and % \begin{marking} % Large node size reduces the height of the B-tree, resulting in % potentially fewer I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. It % can however increase the number of rows locked in a single leaf % node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % % High percent fill means that most pointers in a node will be % allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves % little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values % that change [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \begin{subsubquestion}{2} % low values of the parameter. % \begin{marking} % Small node size increases the height of the B-tree, resulting in % potentially more I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. The % number of rows locked in a single leaf node will be reduced % [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % % Low percent fill means that most pointers in a node will not be % allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves % little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values % that change [$\frac{1}{2}$]. % \end{marking} % \end{subsubquestion} % \end{subquestion} % \end{question} % % % \begin{question}{5}\label{clusterq} % % \begin{subquestion}{2} % Define what is meant by the term ``clustering'' in the context of % physical database design and tuning, and explain why it is beneficial. % % \begin{marking} % Clustering is the grouping of related rows physically near to each % other on disk [1] so that they may be retrieved in as few I/Os as % possible (ideally one)---beneficial because of the slowness of disk % I/O compared to memory I/O [1]. % \end{marking} % \end{subquestion} % % \begin{subquestion}{3}\label{clusterqcode} % Consider the following Oracle8 SQL table definition: % % \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{} % create table enrolment % ( student_id char(7), % paper_code char(7), % enrol_year number(4), % % primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year) % ); % \end{lstlisting} % % The \textsf{Enrolment} table is often queried for all rows relating to % a particular student in a particular year (for example, student % 1234567 in 1998, student 9876543 in 2000, etc.). Write appropriate % Oracle8 SQL code that will cluster the rows of the table in such a way % as to support these types of query (you do not need to calculate % cluster sizes). Relevant Oracle8 syntax diagrams are given on the next % page. % \begin{marking} % \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{} % create cluster enrolment_cluster (student_id char(7), year number(4)); % % create index enrol_cluster_index on cluster enrolment_cluster; % % create table enrolment % ( student_id char(7), % paper_code char(7), % enrol_year number(4), % % primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year) % ) cluster enrolment_cluster(student_id, enrol_year); % \end{lstlisting} % \end{marking} % [1] each for correct cluster, cluster index and table clustering. % \end{subquestion} % % \end{question} % % \end{examsection} % . % . % . % \end{document} % \end{verbatim} % \normalsize % % \begin{figure} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-1}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-2}} % % \begin{center} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-3}} % \end{center} % % \caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam}.} % \label{Fig.Example} % \end{figure} % % \begin{figure} % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-2}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-3}} % % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-4}} % \hfill % \fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-5}} % % \caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam} when % \textsf{markingschedule} is used.} % \label{Fig.Example2} % \end{figure} % % % \StopEventually{} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS Revamped and tided up documentation and code.} % % \section{The code} % % \subsection{Preamble} % % \begin{macrocode} \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01] \ProvidesClass{ouexam}[\shortdate\space v\fileversion\space Otago % University examination paper] % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\@unsupported} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS New \cs{@unsupported} macro.} % This macro is used to handle documents written for older versions of % \textsf{ouexam}. All obsolete macros map to this macro, which prints out an % appropriate error message. It needs to be defined early because it is used % to trap use of the obsolete \textsf{multichoice} class option. % % \begin{macrocode} \def\@unsupported#1{\ClassError{ouexam}{INCOMPATIBLE (#1): this % document was written for an earlier version of ouexam and is % not compatible with ouexam v\fileversion\space Please use ouexam % v1.2 or earlier to process this document. Version 1.2 can be % downloaded from the same location as version\space\fileversion}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{multichoice} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \textsf{multichoice} class option.} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/04}{NJS Removed support for \textsf{multichoice} option.} % The \textsf{multichoice} class option is no longer supported, but rather than % just breaking older documents, we can at least try to present a reasonable % error message. % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{multichoice}{% \OptionNotUsed\@unsupported{multichoice class option} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{twoside} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Turned off \textsf{twoside} option.} % This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of % the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The \textsf{twoside} option does % not really make sense, however---all Otago examination papers are printed % single-sided anyway, and the format is such that two-sided printing would % look no different. The \textsf{twoside} option is therefore not used in this % class. % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{draft} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New \textsf{draft} class option.} % \begin{macro}{\if@draft} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New switch for \textsf{draft}.} % The \textsf{draft} option determines whether the examination is to be printed % in draft mode (default off). The \cs{if@draft} switch is used to determine % whether this is in effect (default false). Draft mode has the usual effects % that you would expect for draft mode in the \textsf{article} class, plus % \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in the header of every page. % % \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@draft \@draftfalse \DeclareOption{draft}{\@drafttrue} % does this need to be passed to the article class? % \end{macrocode} % % Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} package and turn on the % \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all included graphics will % be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the \|draft=false\| option to the % \cs{includegraphics} macro. The amount of effort required to fix what is % a relatively small issue isn't really worth it, so this will not change. % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{markingschedule} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New \textsf{markingschedule} class option.} % \begin{macro}{\if@markingschedule} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New switch for \textsf{markingschedule}.} % The \textsf{markingschedule} option determines whether marking schedule % information is printed in addition to the questions (default off). The % \cs{if@markingschedule} switch is used to determine whether this is in effect % (default false). % % \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@markingschedule \@markingschedulefalse \DeclareOption{markingschedule}{\@markingscheduletrue} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % All other options are passed directly to the \textsf{article} class: % % \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}} \ProcessOptions % \end{macrocode} % % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Changed default point size to 12pt.} % The defaults for this class are \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, % \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. The font size is the only one that might % need to change. % % \begin{macrocode} \LoadClass[onecolumn,oneside,a4paper,12pt]{article} % \end{macrocode} % % % \subsection{Required packages} % % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/08}{NJS Removed requirement for \textsf{calc} and % \textsf{ifthen} packages.} % The only required package is the \textsf{verbatim} package, which is used % to implement the \textsf{marking} environment: % % \begin{macrocode} \RequirePackage{verbatim} % \end{macrocode} % % % \subsection{Page setup} % % \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin} % \begin{macro}{\topmargin} % \begin{macro}{\textwidth} % \begin{macro}{\textheight} % A4 paper is assumed (since this class is intended only for Otago examination % papers, this seems a reasonable assumption). The margins are top and bottom % 2cm, left and right 2.54cm (1in). % % \begin{macrocode} \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0cm} \setlength{\topmargin}{-0.54cm} \setlength{\textwidth}{15.92cm} \setlength{\textheight}{25.7cm} \advance\textheight by-\headheight \advance\textheight by-\headsep \advance\textheight by-\footskip % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Page styles}\label{pagestyles} % % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS Added support to page styles for \textsf{draft} % and \textsf{markingschedule} class options.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/15}{NJS Fixed headers so that the page number is always % centered.} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@plain} % The \textsf{plain} page style is based on that in the \textsf{article} class, % and produces pages with the page number centered at the top, the paper number % in the top right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom % right. If semester information is specified, this is included in parentheses % after the paper code, for example, ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)''. % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@plain{% \def\@oddhead{% % \end{macrocode} % Note that we have to get a bit clever to ensure that the page number is % properly centered in the page header. The naive solution is just to use % \cs{hfill}s, but this will cause the page number to shift around depending on % the length of \cs{@pnumber}. Piet van Oostrum's \textsf{fancyhdr} package will % do this for us, but it seems a bit of overkill to require this package merely % so that we can ensure that the page number remains centered. Instead, we've % borrowed the relevant technique from that class, which draws the left, centre % and right bits of the header as three overlapping boxes. You just have to be % careful that the value of \cs{@pnumber} isn't so long that it overwrites the % page number. % \begin{macrocode} \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}} \let\@evenhead\@oddhead \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}} \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \textsf{plain} is the default page style: % \begin{macrocode} \pagestyle{plain} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@lastpage} % The \textsf{lastpage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without the % ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@lastpage{% \def\@oddhead{% \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}} \let\@evenhead\@oddhead \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule} \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \textsf{lastpage} should be automatically applied to the last page of the % document: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{\thispagestyle{lastpage}} % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage} % The \textsf{titlepage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without % the header. % \begin{macrocode} \def\ps@titlepage{% \def\@oddhead{\@draft}% \let\@evenhead\@oddhead% \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}% \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot% } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Various counters} % % Earlier versions of \textsf{ouexam} used the \textsf{enumerate} % environment to build questions, which meant that special counters were not % required. This version of the class, however, uses a different mechanism for % building questions, so we need to define custom counters for several things. % % \begin{macro}{question} % \begin{macro}{subquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subquestion} counter.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question number from % \cs{labelsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(a)'' % instead of ``1(a)''.} % \begin{macro}{subsubquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubquestion} counter.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS The \texttt{subsubquestion} was incorrectly % printing as ``(a)'' rather than ``(i)''. Fixed.} % \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question numbers from % \cs{labelsubsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(i)'' % instead of ``1(a)(i)''.} % First, we define three counters for the three possible levels of question: % top-level question, second-level sub-question or third-level sub-sub-question: % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{question} \newcounter{subquestion}[question] \newcounter{subsubquestion}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % The three question levels are numbered as 1., (a) and (i) respectively, so we % also need to redefine the associated \cs{the} and \cs{label} macros % appropriately: % \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand{\thequestion}{\arabic{question}} \newcommand{\labelquestion}{\arabic{question}.} \renewcommand{\thesubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})} \newcommand{\labelsubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})} \renewcommand{\thesubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})} \newcommand{\labelsubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{examexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examexpected} counter.} % The \|examexpected\| counter stores the total expected number of marks for the % examination, and defaults to 100: % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{examexpected} \setcounter{examexpected}{100} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \begin{macro}{examoutof} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examoutof} macro.} % To specify that an examination is out of some number of marks other than % 100, use the \cs{examoutof} macro to set the value: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\examoutof}[1]{\setcounter{examexpected}{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{sectexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{sectexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{qexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \cs{qexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subqexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqexpected} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subsubqexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubqexpected} counter.} % The next four counters perform the same function as the \|examexpected\| counter % for sections, questions, sub-questions and sub-sub-questions respectively. No % macros are required to set these values as they are set automatically by the % question-building environments. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{sectexpected} \newcounter{qexpected} \newcounter{subqexpected} \newcounter{subsubqexpected} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{lastexpected} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{lastexpected} counter.} % The \|lastexpected\| counter records the expected marks total for the last % question. This will eventually be used to verify that the marks total for a % marking schedule equals the marks total for the corresponding question, but % this hasn't been implemented yet. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{lastexpected} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{examrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{sectrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \texttt{sectrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{qrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{qrunning} counter.} % \begin{macro}{subqrunning} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqrunning} counter.} % These four counters keep track of the running total of marks for the % current examination, section, question and subquestion respectively. This % is later compared against the corresponding expected total. A running total % is not needed for sub-sub-questions because they do not have sub-parts. The % \|qrunning\| and \|subqrunning\| counters are reset when the associated % question counters are incremented. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{examrunning} \setcounter{examrunning}{0} \newcounter{sectrunning} \newcounter{qrunning}[question] \newcounter{subqrunning}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{hassubs} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubs} counter.} % \begin{macro}{hassubsubs} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubsubs} counter.} % These two counters are used to track whether questions and % sub-questions have sub-parts. Counters are used rather than booleans because % counters are set globally and booleans are not (or at least do not appear to % be). Both counters reset when the associated question counters are % incremented. % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{hassubs}[question] \newcounter{hassubsubs}[subquestion] % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % At the end of the document, check that the running total of marks for the % examination matches what we were expecting: % % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \ifnum\theexamexpected=\theexamrunning \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual number of marks for exam % (\theexamrunning) does not match expected number of marks % (\theexamexpected)} \fi } % \end{macrocode} % % \begin{macro}{xsection} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/29}{NJS New \texttt{xsection} counter.} % Finally, we set up a counter for the section ``number'' and define it so % that it prints out as an upper case letter rather than a number. We could % just redefine the \|section\| counter, but that interferes with the section % numbering in the documentation, and we can't have that, can we? \|:)\| % % \begin{macrocode} \newcounter{xsection} \setcounter{xsection}{0} \renewcommand{\thexsection}{\Alph{xsection}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Question-building environments and associated items} % % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{question} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct % placement of marks in output.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Total marks for a question are now printed only % if the question has no sub-questions.} % \begin{environment}{question} % The \textsf{question} environment specifies a top-level question, and produces % questions numbered in the form ``1.'', ``2.'', etc. It has one mandatory % argument, the number of marks allocated to the question, which is used to % initialise the \|qexpected\| counter\footnote{If it were not for the fact that % you can only refer to environment arguments in the environment preamble, the % \texttt{qexpected} counter would be unnecessary.}. If the argument is left % empty, default to zero for the number of marks: % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{question}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{qexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{qexpected}{#1}\fi % \end{macrocode} % % For each top-level question, we increment the \|question\| counter, which also % resets the \|hassubs\| and \|qrunning\| counters to zero: % \begin{macrocode} \refstepcounter{question} % \end{macrocode} % The question itself is built using a single-item \textsf{list} environment. % \begin{macrocode} \begin{list}{\labelquestion}{} \item % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, the following things happen: % \begin{enumerate} % \item If the question has no sub-questions, the value of the \|qexpected\| % counter is added to \|examrunning\| and \|sectrunning\|, and both \|qrunning\| % and \|lastexpected\| are set to the value of \|qexpected\|. % % \begin{macrocode} }{% \ifnum\thehassubs=0 \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{qexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{qexpected}} \setcounter{qrunning}{\value{qexpected}} % \end{macrocode} % % The total number of marks for the question is then printed right-justified % on the line as ``(\emph{m} marks)'' where \emph{m} is the value of the % \|qrunning\| counter. The environment determines whether to print ``mark'' or % ``marks'' automatically, and figures out whether the number of marks will fit % on the last line of the question or needs to be placed on the next line. % The code for handling the line breaking is derived from an example on page % 106 of \emph{The \TeX{}book}: % % \begin{macrocode} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\theqrunning~\ifnum\theqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par % \end{macrocode} % % \item If the question \emph{does} have sub-questions, then \|qrunning\|, % \|examrunning\| and \|sectrunning\| have already been set by the various % sub-environments. The value of \|qrunning\| is then compared with % \|qexpected\|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number % of marks for the question is \emph{not} printed in this case. % % \begin{macrocode} \else \ifnum\theqrunning=\theqexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\theqrunning) for % question \thequestion\space doesn't match expected mark % (\theqexpected)} \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} % % \item \|lastexpected\| is set to the value of \|qexpected\| so it can be used % in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment. % % \begin{macrocode} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{qexpected}} \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % % \end{enumerate} % \end{environment} % % \begin{environment}{subquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subquestion} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement % of marks in output.} % The \textsf{subquestion} environment is the analogue of \textsf{question} for % sub-questions. On initialisation, it sets \|subqexpected\| to the value of the % mandatory argument (defaulting to zero if the argument is empty), increments % the \|hassubs\| counter so that the enclosing \textsf{question} environment can % react appropriately, increments \|subquestion\| (thus resetting \|hassubsubs\| and % \|subqrunning\| to zero) and opens a single-item list with numbering of the form % ``(a)'', ``(b)'', etc. % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{subquestion}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subqexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}\fi \setcounter{subqexpected}{#1} \addtocounter{hassubs}{1} \refstepcounter{subquestion} \begin{list}{\labelsubquestion}{} \item }{% % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, if performs similar checks to the % \textsf{question} environment. If the sub-question has no sub-sub-questions, % the value of \|subqexpected\| is added to \|qrunning\| and \|sectrunning\|: % % \begin{macrocode} \ifnum\thehassubsubs=0 \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} \setcounter{subqrunning}{\value{subqexpected}} % \end{macrocode} % Then the number of marks for the sub-question are typeset in a similar manner % to the \textsf{question} environment: % \begin{macrocode} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\thesubqrunning~\ifnum\thesubqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par % \end{macrocode} % % If the sub-question \emph{does} have sub-sub-questions, check the running total % against the expected number and raise an error if they don't match. % \begin{macrocode} \else \ifnum\thesubqrunning=\thesubqexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesubqrunning) for % question \thesubquestion\space doesn't match expected mark % (\thesubqexpected)} \fi \fi % \end{macrocode} % Finally, set \|lastexpected\| to the value of \|qexpected\| so it can be used % in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment. % \begin{macrocode} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subqexpected}} \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{environment} % % \begin{environment}{subsubquestion} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subsubquestion} environment no longer a % redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement % of marks in output.} % This is similar to both \textsf{question} and \textsf{subquestion}, and % generates an appropriately numbered sub-sub-question (``(i)'', ``(ii)'', etc.). % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{subsubquestion}[1]{% \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{#1}\fi % \end{macrocode} % Increment \|hassubsubs\| so that the enclosing \textsf{subquestion} environment % can react appropriately: % \begin{macrocode} \addtocounter{hassubsubs}{1} \refstepcounter{subsubquestion} \begin{list}{\labelsubsubquestion}{} \item }{% % \end{macrocode} % % Closing this environment is a bit simpler than the previous two because we % don't need to check whether the sub-sub-question has any sub-components (this % never happens). All we have to do is set the appropriate counters and typeset % the number of marks. % % \begin{macrocode} \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \addtocounter{subqrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subsubqexpected}} \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak \hfil(\thesubsubqexpected~\ifnum\thesubsubqexpected=1 mark \else marks\fi) \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par \end{list} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{environment} % % Note that none of these three environments check whether they are correctly % nested (i.e., \textsf{subsubquestion} within \textsf{subquestion} within % \textsf{question}). % % % \subsection{Draft examination printing} % % \begin{macro}{\@marking} % \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS New \cs{@draft} macro.} % Specifying the \textsf{draft} option causes \textsf{ouexam} to print % \fbox{DRAFT} in large letters in the header of every page. This is drawn by % the \cs{@draft} macro, which is included in the page header definition of % all the page styles for this class (see % \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref{pagestyles}}). \textbf{Note:} Because % the \cs{@draft} macro is included in the page header, it will usually % overflow the page boundaries, causing ``\|Overfull \vbox\|'' warnings. Note % the extra set of braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}. % % \begin{macrocode} \if@draft\def\@draft{{\Huge\fbox{DRAFT}}} \else\let\@draft\@empty \fi % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Marking schedule information} % % \begin{environment}{marking} % \begin{macro}{\@markingschedule} % \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New \textsf{marking} environment for including % answers and/or marking schedule information.} % \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS Now prints ``MARKING SCHEDULE'' at the bottom % of every page if the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified.} % The \textsf{marking} environment allows the specification of marking % schedule information in the same location as the questions. If the % \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified, marking schedule % information is printed in italics. In addition, \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} is % printed in large letters in the footer of every page. This is drawn by the % \cs{@markingschedule} macro, which is included in the page footer % definition of all the page styles for this class (see % \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref{pagestyles}}). Note the extra set of % braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}. % % \begin{macrocode} \if@markingschedule \newenvironment{marking}{\itshape}{\normalfont} \def\@markingschedule{{\Huge\fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE}}} \else % \end{macrocode} % % Normally \textsf{marking} just maps to the \textsf{comment} environment from % Rainer Sch\"{o}pf's \textsf{verbatim} package, i.e., marking information is not % printed: % % \begin{macrocode} \let\marking\comment \let\endmarking\endcomment \let\@markingschedule\@empty \fi % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % % % \subsection{Section handling} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS new \textsf{examsection} environment.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{@defsecinst} macro.} % \begin{environment}{examsection} % \begin{macro}{\@defsecinst} % The \textsf{examsection} environment specifies a major section of an % examination paper. Sections are sequentially numbered ``A'', ``B'', etc. The % environment has three arguments: % % \begin{enumerate} % \item The expected number of marks for the section. % % \item The instructions for this section. This defaults to ``ANSWER ALL % QUESTIONS.'' if left blank. To change the default text, redefine the % \cs{@defsecinst} macro. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@defsecinst{ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.} % \end{macrocode} % % \item A description of the contents of the section which may be left blank. % \end{enumerate} % % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{examsection}[3]{% % \end{macrocode} % Every section begins on a new page. % \begin{macrocode} \newpage % \end{macrocode} % If the argument for the number of marks is left empty, default to zero. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@nummarks{#1} \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{sectexpected}{0} \else\setcounter{sectexpected}{#1}\fi \refstepcounter{xsection} \setcounter{sectrunning}{0} % \end{macrocode} % The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in % \cs{large} size. % \begin{macrocode} {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] \def\@usersecinst{#2} \ifx\@usersecinst\@empty\@defsecinst\else\@usersecinst\fi\par \def\@usersectopic{#3} \ifx\@usersectopic\@empty\else\par\noindent\@usersectopic\fi \\ }{% % \end{macrocode} % % When the environment closes, the value of \|sectrunning\| is compared against % \|sectexpected\|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number % marks for the section is printed in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL % \emph{m} MARKS]}'' where \emph{m} is the value of \|sectrunning\|. % % \begin{macrocode} \ifnum\thesectrunning=\thesectexpected \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesectrunning) for section % \thexsection\space doesn't match expected mark (\thesectexpected)} \fi \bigskip\hfill\textbf{[SECTION \thexsection\ TOTAL % \thesectrunning\ MARKS]} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % % \begin{macro}{\newsection} % \textbf{[DEPRECATED]} The \cs{newsection} macro generates a new examination % section, appropriately numbered. The optional argument contains instructions % for answering the questions in the new section, and defaults to ``ANSWER ALL % QUESTIONS''. This macro is included only for backwards compatibility with % previous versions. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro % and should be used in new documents. This macro will eventually be deleted. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\newsection}[1][ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.]{% \ClassWarning{ouexam}{DEPRECATED: The \protect\newsection\space % macro is deprecated; use the examsection environment instead} % \end{macrocode} % Every section begins on a new page. % \begin{macrocode} \newpage \refstepcounter{xsection} % \end{macrocode} % The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in % \cs{large} size. Note that sections are ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots. % \begin{macrocode} {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}} \\[0.5\baselineskip] #1 } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Title page generation} % % \begin{macro}{\examyear} % \begin{macro}{\@year} % The \cs{examyear} macro specifies the year in which the examination is being % held. It redefines the \cs{@year} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\examyear}[1]{\def\@year{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % This macro is required: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@year{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\examyear\space was specified} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\department} % \begin{macro}{\@dept} % The \cs{department} macro specifies the name of the department, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@dept} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\department}[1]{\def\@dept{#1}} \def\@dept{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\department\space was specified} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\papernumber} % \begin{macro}{\@pnumber} % The \cs{papernumber} macro specifies the paper number, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@pnumber} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\papernumber}[1]{\def\@pnumber{#1}} \def\@pnumber{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papernumber\space was specified} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\papertitle} % \begin{macro}{\@ptitle} % The \cs{papertitle} macro specifies the title of the paper, and is required. % It redefines the \cs{@ptitle} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\papertitle}[1]{\def\@ptitle{#1}} \def\@ptitle{% \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papertitle\space was specified} } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\semester} % \begin{macro}{\@semester} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/14}{NJS Rewrote \cs{semester} to support summer school % and special exams.} % The \cs{semester} macro specifies which semester the examination is for. Legal % values for the argument are ``1'', ``2'', ``SS'' for summer school or ``SP'' for % a special examination---anything else is ignored. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@ONE{1} \def\@TWO{2} \def\@SS{SS} \def\@SP{SP} % \end{macrocode} % This macro redefines the \cs{@semester} macro which is used in % \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\semester}[1]{% \def\@sem{#1} \ifx\@sem\@ONE\def\@semester{Semester One} \else\ifx\@sem\@TWO\def\@semester{Semester Two} \else\ifx\@sem\@SS\def\@semester{Summer School} \else\ifx\@sem\@SP\def\@semester{Special Examination} \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{invalid value `#1' for % \protect\semester\space; valid values are `1', `2', `SS' % and `SP'. No semester information will be printed} \fi\fi\fi\fi } % \end{macrocode} % \cs{semester} is optional---if you omit it or give it an invalid argument, % \cs{@semester} remains empty. % \begin{macrocode} \let\@semester\@empty % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\timeallowed} % \begin{macro}{\@hours} % The \cs{timeallowed} macro specifies the length of the examination in hours. % It redefines the \cs{@hours} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\timeallowed}[1]{\def\@hours{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{timeallowed} is optional---if you omit it, \cs{@hours} defaults to ``3'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\@hours{3} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{num.pages} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed label from \cs{page.last}.} % There is no macro to specify the number of pages in the examination because % it is done automatically by inserting a \cs{newlabel} that refers to the last % page directly into the \|.aux\| file: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{num.pages}{{}{\thepage}}} } % \end{macrocode} % This label is then referenced in \cs{@maketitlepage}. % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{num.questions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \cs{num.questions} label representing the % number of questions.} % Similarly, there is no macro to specify the number of questions in the % examination. This is calculated using the same method as for the number of % pages: % \begin{macrocode} \AtEndDocument{% \immediate\write\@auxout{% \string\newlabel{num.questions}{{}{\thequestion}} } } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\instructions} % \begin{macro}{\@instructions} % The \cs{instructions} macro specifies instructions on how candidates should % answer questions. It redefines the \cs{@instructions} macro that is used in % \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \def\@instructions{Answer \underline{ALL} questions.} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{instructions} is optional. If you omit it, \cs{@instructions} defaults % to ``Answer \underline{ALL} questions.'' % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\instructions}[1]{\def\@instructions{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\material} % \begin{macro}{\@material} % The \cs{material} macro lets specifies any additional material that candidates % are provided in addition to the examination paper itself, and is optional. % It redefines the \cs{@material} macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@material\@empty \newcommand{\material}[1]{\def\@material{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\allowcalculators} % \begin{macro}{\@calculators} % The \cs{allowcalculators} macro specifies whether or not calculators are % allowed in the examination. If \cs{allowcalculators} is omitted, \cs{@calculators} % defaults to ``may not'': % \begin{macrocode} \def\@calculators{may not} % \end{macrocode} % Issuing an \cs{allowcalculators} changes the redefines \cs{@calculators} to % ``may'': % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\allowcalculators}{\def\@calculators{may}} % \end{macrocode} % \cs{@calculators} is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}. % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\copiesof} % \begin{macro}{\@copiesof} % The \cs{copiesof} macro specifies any material that candidates are allowed to % bring into the examination, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@copiesof} % macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@copiesof\@empty \newcommand{\copiesof}[1]{\def\@copiesof{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\otherinstructions} % \begin{macro}{\@otherinst} % The \cs{otherinstructions} macro specifies any other instructions not covered % by any of the above, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@otherinst} % macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}: % \begin{macrocode} \let\@otherinst\@empty \newcommand{\otherinstructions}[1]{\def\@otherinst{#1}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\maketitlepage} % The \cs{maketitlepage} macro is the \textsf{ouexam} analogue of \cs{maketitle}. % It takes all of the information provided by the above macros and generates a % properly formatted examination title page. If you want to design your own title % page styles, redefine \cs{@maketitlepage} (this is not normally recommended % however). % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\maketitlepage}{\@maketitlepage} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % \begin{macro}{\@maketitlepage} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed macro from \cs{maketitlepage}.} % The \cs{@maketitlepage} macro generates an examination title page that % meets the Otago University requirements for final examination papers. You % can redefine this if you want to change the format, but normally you would % not do this. % \begin{macrocode} \def\@maketitlepage{% \thispagestyle{titlepage} % \end{macrocode} % The header information for the examination is printed centered at the top % of the page. The department, paper number and paper title (and the semester % information if required) are placed inside a double box. % \begin{macrocode} \begin{center} {\Large \textbf{UNIVERSITY OF OTAGO EXAMINATIONS \@year}} \\[\baselineskip] \fbox{\framebox[\linewidth]{% \begin{tabular}{c} \\ {\large \@dept} \\ \\ {\large Paper \@pnumber} \\ \\ {\large \@ptitle} \\ \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\@semester \\ \fi \\ \end{tabular}% }} \mbox{}\\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Next, the time allowed for completing the examination: % \begin{macrocode} \textbf{(TIME ALLOWED: \@hours\ HOURS)} \\[\baselineskip] \end{center} % \end{macrocode} % The number of pages is automatically calculated, as described earlier. All we % need to do is reference the \|num.pages\| label that we put into the \|.aux\| % file: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{This examination paper comprises \pageref{num.pages} pages.} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out the instructions for answering questions: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Candidates should answer questions as follows:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@instructions\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out any provided material: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{The following material is provided:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@material\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out use of calculators section: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Use of calculators:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm} Electronic calculators \@calculators\ be used in this examination. \\[\baselineskip] Please note: where the use of calculators is permitted, these must be non-pro\-gram\-ma\-ble, hand-held calculators without alphabetic key pads. \end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.) \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out anything that candidates are allowed to bring: % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Candidates are permitted copies of:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@copiesof\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.) \\[\baselineskip] % \end{macrocode} % Print out other instructions, and finish. % \begin{macrocode} \underline{Other Instructions:} \\[\baselineskip] \hspace{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@otherinst\end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip] \newpage } % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % % % \subsection{Obsolete macros and environments} % % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS All \textsf{multichoice} macros and environments % made obsolete.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \cs{markingschedule}, \cs{marks}, \cs{totalmarks} % macros made obsolete.} % \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions}, % \textsf{subsubquestions} environments made obsolete.} % The following macros and environments are no longer supported as of version % 2.0. Documents that use these macros can be processed using ouexam v1.2 or % earlier. The obsolete multiple-choice examination support is dealt with % during option processing, so we can ignore the obsolete multiple-choice % macros. % % \begin{environment}{questions} % \begin{environment}{subquestions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is % active.} % \begin{environment}{subsubquestions} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is % active.} % \begin{macro}{markingschedule} % \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New macro to turn marking information on and % off.} % The \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions} and \textsf{subsubquestions} % environments have been replaced by the \textsf{question}, % \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion} environments respectively. % \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{questions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{questions environment}}}{} \newenvironment{subquestions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{subquestions environment}}}{} \newenvironment{subsubquestions}{% \def\item{\@unsupported{subsubquestions environment}}}{} % \end{macrocode} % The \cs{markingschedule} macro has been replaced by the % \textsf{markingschedule} class option. We can't map this to the % \cs{@unsupported} macro because \cs{markingschedule} occurs in the document % preamble. Mapping it to \cs{@unsupported} causes \TeX\ to blow up for some % reason. It's safe enough to ignore it. % \begin{macrocode} \let\markingschedule\@empty % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{environment} % \end{environment} % \end{environment} % % \begin{macro}{\marks} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS This macro now increments the \texttt{marks} % counter.} % \begin{macro}{\totalmarks} % \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Removed the parameter for the number of marks; % Both these macros have been replaced by automatic calculations within the % question-building environments.} % The \cs{marks} macro has been replaced by the argument to the various % question-building environments. The \cs{totalmarks} macro has been replaced % by automatic calculations within these environments. % \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\marks}[1]{\@unsupported{marks macro}} \newcommand{\totalmarks}{\@unsupported{totalmarks macro}} % \end{macrocode} % \end{macro} % \end{macro} % % % % \Finale % % \PrintChanges

Ignore Space Show notes View

ouexam.dtx

\def\ouexamdate{22 August 2002}
\def\ouexamversion{2.0.2}
\def\ouexamshortdate{2002/08/22}
% \iffalse meta-comment
%%
%% ouexam.dtx Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago
%% 
%% You may use this package freely, and also distribute it
%% provided that you don't change it, make any money off
%% it or pretend that you wrote it.
%%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{doc}
\DisableCrossrefs
\CodelineNumbered
\RecordChanges

\usepackage{graphicx}
% change hyperref options as required
\usepackage[dvips,colorlinks,pdfpagemode=None,a4paper,urlcolor=blue,
            linkcolor=red,pdfauthor={Nigel Stanger}]{hyperref}

\title{The \textsf{ouexam} document class, v\ouexamversion}
\author{Nigel Stanger\\nstanger@infoscience.otago.ac.nz}
\date{\ouexamdate}

\begin{document}
\maketitle
\DocInput{ouexam.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%
% \fi
%
%% \CheckSum{771}
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    $     Right paren   $
%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%%
%
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% 
% \changes{1.0}{1999/04/15}{Initial version.}
%
% \begin{abstract}
% This document class allows you to create Otago University final
% examination papers using \LaTeXe\@. It implements the major formatting
% requirements specified by the University, provides useful
% macros to ease the process of building the title page and automatically
% deals with fiddly little issues such as question and section numbering,
% the number of pages in the paper, printing ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the
% bottom right corner of every page except the last one and ensuring that the
% total number of marks for a question adds up to the expected number.
% \end{abstract}
% 
% 
% \tableofcontents
% 
% 
% \section{Overview}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/11}{NJS Added note on backwards compatibility.}
% \subsection{Important note on backwards compatibility}
% 
% Version 2.0 of \textsf{ouexam} introduces several major changes from earlier
% versions. Consequently, documents created using an earlier version of
% \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{incompatible} with version 2.0 or later. Versions 2.0
% and greater of \textsf{ouexam} will detect attempts to process version 1.x
% document and display an error message.
% 
% The older version (1.2) is still available and can be downloaded from the same
% location as the current version. To process older version documents, just copy
% the version 1.2 |ouexam.cls| file into the same directory as the document file.
% \TeX\ searches the current directory first, so this copy will take precedence
% over any other installed version of \textsf{ouexam}.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Class options}
%
% This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of
% the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The default options are
% \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}.
% Normally the only one you might want to change is the last one.
% In addition, \textsf{ouexam} accepts the following ``native'' class options:
% \begin{description}
% 	\item[\textsf{draft}] \DescribeMacro{draft} This option has the usual
% 	effects that you would expect for \textsf{draft} mode in the
% 	\textsf{article} class, plus \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in
% 	the header of every page. Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx}
% 	package and turn on the \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all
% 	included graphics will be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the
% 	|draft=false| option to \cs{includegraphics}.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{markingschedule}] \DescribeMacro{markingschedule} This option
% 	Rather than write a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, you
% 	can use the \textsf{marking} environment to embed marking information
% 	within questions (see 
% 	\hyperref[Sec:Questions:Marking]{section~\ref*{Sec:Questions:Marking}}).
% 	By default this information is not printed (for obvious reasons!), but
% 	when it comes time to print a marking schedule for the examination,
% 	including the \textsf{markingschedule} class option in the
% 	\cs{usepackage} command will cause \textsf{ouexam} to print the hidden
% 	content. It will also print \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} in the footer of
% 	every page.
% \end{description}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Required packages}
% 
% This class requires the \textsf{verbatim} package in order to implement
% the marking schedule functionality.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page margins}
% 
% This class assumes A4 paper. You will probably get weird results if you try
% to do anything different. The margins are set up as follows: top and bottom
% 2cm (headers and footers are inside this margin), left and right 2.54cm (1in).
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page styles}
% 
% There are three page styles defined in this class:
% \begin{description}
% 	\item[\textsf{plain}] \DescribeMacro{plain} This is a slight modification
% 	of the \textsf{plain} page style from \textsf{article}. It produces pages
% 	that have the page number centered at the top, the paper number in the top
% 	right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom right. This
% 	is the default page style.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{lastpage}] \DescribeMacro{lastpage} This is similar to
% 	\textsf{plain} but without the ``\textbf{TURN OVER}''. It is used for the
% 	last page of the examination. You normally will not have to use this
% 	yourself---the class should take care of it automatically. The class does
% 	however occasionally seem to get confused, so there may times when you have
% 	to set the page style of the last page manually. It will be fairly obvious
% 	when you need to do this---the usual effect is that the last page
% 	has``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' printed on it when it should not.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{titlepage}] \DescribeMacro{titlepage} This is similar to
% 	\textsf{plain} but without the page header, and is used for the title page
% 	of the paper. As with \textsf{lastpage}, you will normally not use this
% 	yourself, because the \cs{maketitlepage} macro handles this automatically
% 	(see \hyperref[Sec:TitlePage]{section~\ref*{Sec:TitlePage}}).
% \end{description}
% 
% 
% \section{Writing an examination paper}
% 
% 
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/05/11}{NJS Moved the title page subsection to the start
% of this section.}
% \subsection{The title page}
% \label{Sec:TitlePage}
% 
% This class defines a collection of macros that let you fill in the various
% parts of the examination title page. This is analogous to the process you use
% to generate the title of a document in, for example, the \textsf{article} class
% (using \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{date} and \cs{maketitle}). That is, you
% issue the macros described below in the document preamble, then issue a
% \cs{maketitlepage} in the document body.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\examyear} \cs{examyear} macro lets you specify the year
% in which the examination is being held, for example, |\examyear{1999}|. This
% macro is mandatory.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\department} \cs{department} macro lets you specify the
% name of the department that produced the examination paper, for example,
% |\department{Information| |Science}|. This macro is mandatory.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\papernumber} \cs{papernumber} macro lets you specify the
% paper number that the examination is for, for example,
% |\papernumber{COMP 101}|. This macro is mandatory. \textbf{Warning:} Do not make
% the paper number string too long or it will overlap the page number. Be
% particularly careful when you specify semester information using \cs{semester},
% because this is appended to the paper number in the page header. For example,
% if you specify |\papernumber{COMP 101}| and |\semester{2}|, the header will
% contain ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)'' rather than just ``COMP 101''. The worst
% case you will need to consider in such situations is a special examination,
% which inserts the text ``(Special Examination)'' after the paper number.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\papertitle} \cs{papertitle} macro lets you specify the
% title of the paper, for example, 
% |\papertitle{Systems Analysis and Design Methods}|. This macro is mandatory.
% 
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added `FY' to the \cs{semester} macro
% description.}
% Some papers are offered in more than one semester. The
% \DescribeMacro{\semester} \cs{semester} macro lets you specify which
% semester the examination is for. The argument can be either ``1'' or ``2''
% for semesters 1 and 2, ``SS'' for summer school, ``FY'' for a full-year
% paper or ``SP'' for a special examination, for example, |\semester{2}|.
% Invalid values for the argument cause a warning to be raised. This macro is
% optional---if you omit it, no semester information is generated.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\timeallowed} \cs{timeallowed} macro lets you specify the
% length of the examination in hours, for example, |\timeallowed{2}|. This
% macro is optional---if you omit it, it defaults to three (3) hours.
% 
% If calculators are allowed in the examination, use the
% \DescribeMacro{\allowcalculators} \cs{allowcalculators} macro. This macro is
% optional---if you omit it, a sentence is printed saying that calculators
% are \emph{not} allowed.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\instructions} \cs{instructions} macro lets you specify
% instructions on how candidates should complete the
% examination, for example, |\instructions{Answer ALL| |questions.}|. This macro
% is optional. Note that the content of the instructions can be just about
% anything. It is up to you to control formatting, such as how you want lines
% broken, etc. This also true of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and
% \cs{otherinstructions} macros described below.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\material} \cs{material} macro lets you specify any
% additional material that candidates are provided in addition to the
% examination paper itself, for example, |\material{SQL schema definition}|.
% This macro is optional.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\copiesof} \cs{copiesof} macro lets you specify any
% material that candidates are allowed to bring into the examination, for
% example, |\copiesof{McFadden &| |Hoffer, 5th edition}|. This macro is
% optional.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\otherinstructions} \cs{otherinstructions} macro lets you
% specify any other instructions not covered by any of the above, for example,
% |\otherinstructions{No smoking| |allowed.}|. This macro is optional.
% 
% Once you have specified the content of the title page using the above
% macros, you simply issue a \DescribeMacro{\maketitlepage} \cs{maketitlepage}
% to generate the front page of the examination (cf. \cs{maketitle}). The title
% page generated meets University formatting requirements.
% Note that the number of pages in the examination paper is generated
% and inserted into the title page automatically---you do not need to specify
% it manually.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Sections}
% \label{Sec:Sections}
% 
% Examination papers may optionally have multiple sections, ``numbered'' A,
% B, \ldots. Rather than redefine the existing section macros, this class
% defines an \DescribeEnv{examsection} \textsf{examsection}
% environment\footnote{Note that the old \cs{newsection} macro has been
% retained for backwards compatibility with earlier development versions of
% \textsf{ouexam}. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro
% and should be used in all new documents.} that generates a new section. The
% \textsf{examsection} environment has three mandatory arguments:
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item The expected number of marks for the question. If you leave this
% 	argument empty it defaults to zero. \textsf{ouexam} keeps a running total
% 	of the \emph{actual} number of marks encountered within a section, which is
% 	compared with the value of this argument when the environment is closed.
% 	An error is raised if the values are not equal. The running total is also
% 	typeset right-justified in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 20 MARKS]}''
% 	as an additional verification.
% 	
% 	\item Instructions for answering questions in this section (such as
% 	``Answer any TWO questions.''). If you leave this argument empty it
% 	defaults to ``ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.''.
% 	
% 	\item A description of the topic of the section. This can be left
% 	empty.
% \end{enumerate}
% Every section begins on a new page, and the section title is formatted as
% ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in \cs{large} size. For example:	\\
% 
% \noindent|\begin{examsection}{25}{}{These questions are remarkably boring.}|	\\
% \hspace*{1cm}\vdots	\\
% |\end{examsection}|	\\
% 
% \noindent will produce the following (assuming that the actual number of
% marks in the question is correct):
% 
% \begin{center}
% 	\fbox{%
% 	\begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth}
% 		{\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~A}}}	\\[0.5\baselineskip]
% 		ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.	\\
% 		These questions are remarkably boring.	\\
% 		\hspace*{2cm}\vdots	\\
% 		\mbox{}\hfill\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 25 MARKS]}
% 	\end{minipage}
% 	}
% \end{center}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Questions}
% \label{Sec:Questions}
% 
% \textsf{ouexam} provides three environments for building examination
% questions: \DescribeEnv{question} \textsf{question},
% \DescribeEnv{subquestion} \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion},
% which correspond to top-level questions, parts of questions, and
% \DescribeEnv{subsubquestion} sub-parts of questions respectively. They
% produce questions that are numbered according to University examination
% formatting requirements. Note that questions are normally numbered
% sequentially throughout the entire paper regardless of any section
% boundaries.
% 
% All three environments have a single mandatory argument which is the
% expected number of marks for the question, part or sub-part. If this
% argument is left empty it will default to zero. This argument works in much
% the same way as the first argument to the \textsf{examsection} environment
% (see \hyperref[Sec:Sections]{section~\ref*{Sec:Sections}}): \textsf{ouexam}
% keeps a running total of the number of marks encountered within each
% question part and sub-part, and compares this total with the expected value
% when the environment closes. Where appropriate, the running total is
% typeset right-justified in the form ``(5 marks)''. For example:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{question}{5}
%   \begin{subquestion}{2}
%     Why is the sky blue?
%   \end{subquestion}
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}
%     Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink.
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
% \begin{question}{1}
%   Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''.
% \end{question}
% \end{verbatim}
% 
% \noindent will produce the following:
% \begin{center}
% 	\fbox{%
% 	\begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth}
% 		\begin{enumerate}
% 			\item
% 			\begin{enumerate}
% 				\item Why is the sky blue? \hfill (2 marks)
% 
% 				\item Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. \hfill (3
% 				marks)
% 			\end{enumerate}
% 
% 			\item Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. \hfill (1
% 			mark)
% 		\end{enumerate}
% 	\end{minipage}
% 	}
% \end{center}
% 
% The \textsf{question} environments handle formatting of marks totals
% automatically, including considerations such as:
% \begin{itemize}
% 	\item whether or not to print the number of marks for a question at all
% 	(they should not be printed if the question has sub-parts);
% 	
% 	\item whether to print ``mark'' or ``marks'' (e.g., question 2 above); and
% 	
% 	\item where to position the number of marks relative to the question,
% 	depending on how full the last line of the question is.
% \end{itemize}
%
% 
% \subsection{Marking schedule information}
% \label{Sec:Questions:Marking}
% 
% Rather than writing a separate marking schedule for an examination paper,
% you can use the \DescribeEnv{marking} \textsf{marking} environment to embed
% marking information within questions. By default this information is not
% printed (for obvious reasons!), but when it comes time to print a marking
% schedule for the examination, use the \textsf{markingschedule} class option
% to print the hidden content. The marking information will be printed in
% \emph{italics} to differentiate it from the main body of the examination,
% and \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} will also be printed in the footer of every
% page.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Miscellaneous}
% 
% Most examinationss are marked out of 100, and \textsf{ouexam} defaults to
% this. However, if you want an examination that is marked out of some other
% number, for example, 90 marks, you can specify this using the
% \DescribeMacro{\examoutof} \cs{examoutof} macro. Thus, |\examoutof{90}|
% will set the expected number of marks for the examination to 90. This value
% is used by \textsf{ouexam} to verify that the marks for all the questions
% add up to the expected number of marks for the examination.
% 
% 
% \section{Errors and warnings}
% 
% In this section are described the error messages and warning produced by
% \textsf{ouexam}, and the reasons why they occur.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Error messages}
% 
% \noindent\texttt{INCOMPATIBLE (\ldots): this document was written for an
% earlier}	\\
% \texttt{version of ouexam \ldots}	\\
% You are trying to use v2.0 or later of \textsf{ouexam} with a document that
% was written for \textsf{ouexam} v1.2 or earlier. Versions 2.0 and later of
% \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{fundamentally incompatible} with earlier
% versions. The only solutions here are either to revert to \textsf{ouexam}
% v1.2 or earlier (you can put a copy of the class file in the same directory
% as the document), or rewrite the document to conform to the current version
% of \textsf{ouexam}. You should be able to download a copy of v1.2 from the
% same location that you found the current version.	\\
% 	
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{examyear} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{department} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papernumber} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papertitle} was specified}	\\
% You have not specified one of these macros. All four of these macros are
% mandatory and must be included in the preamble of any \textsf{ouexam}
% document.	\\
% 
% 
% \subsection{Warnings}
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual number of marks for exam (\ldots) does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{number of marks (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for the whole examination (calculated
% by summing the marks for all the questions) is not the same as the expected
% total for the examination. Adjust the marks for the questions until the
% totals match.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for section \ldots\ does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{mark (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for a particular section (calculated by
% summing the marks for all the questions in that section) is not the same as
% the expected total for that section. Adjust the marks for the questions in
% the section concerned until the totals match. The section number is given
% in the warning.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for question \ldots\ does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{mark (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for a particular question (calculated
% by summing the marks of all its sub-parts) is not the same as the expected
% total for that question. Adjust the marks for the sub-parts of the
% question until the totals match. The question number is given
% in the warning.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{DEPRECATED: The \cs{newsection} macro is deprecated; use
% the}	\\
% \texttt{examsection environment instead}	\\
% The \cs{newsection} macro is a hangover from earlier versions of
% \textsf{ouexam}, and has been left in v2.0 for backwards compatibility with
% some documents that use it. The entire sectioning mechanism was rewritten
% from scratch for v2.0, so this macro is now deprecated and will eventually
% disappear. You should use the \textsf{examsection} environment
% instead.	\\
% 
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added `FY' to \cs{semester} error
% description.}
% \noindent\texttt{invalid value `\ldots' for \cs{semester}; valid values are
% `1', `2', `SS',}	\\*
% \texttt{`FY' and `SP'. No semester information will be printed}	\\* You
% have given an invalid value as the argument to the \cs{semester} macro. The
% allowed values are `1' (semester one), `2' (semester two), `SS' (summer
% school), `FY' (full-year) and `SP' (special examination). Any other values
% will be ignored. Note that these are case-sensitive, for example, `sp' is
% invalid. 	\\
% 
% 
% \section{Example}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/25}{NJS Updated example to conform to 2.0 changes.}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Updated example to conform to 1.1 changes.}
% The code given below is for the first three pages of the INFO~321 2001
% final examination. The output produced by this source is shown in
% \hyperref[Fig.Example]{figure~\ref*{Fig.Example} on
% page~\pageref*{Fig.Example}}. Particular points to note in this example
% are:
% 
% \begin{itemize}
% 
% 	\item The number of hours is not specified, so it defaults to three.
% 
% 	\item This examination allows calculators.
% 	
% 	\item The \textsf{listings} package is used to typeset code listings.
% 
% 	\item The argument of the \cs{instructions} macro can be just about
% 	anything, as can the arguments of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and
% 	\cs{otherinstructions} macros. In this example, the \cs{instructions}
% 	macro has been omitted, causing \textsf{ouexam} to output the default
%	instructions.
% 
% 	\item Marking schedule information has been embedded within the
% 	questions. \hyperref[Fig.Example2]{Figure~\ref*{Fig.Example2} on
% 	page~\pageref*{Fig.Example2}} shows the output produced by this source
% 	when the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is used.
% 
% \end{itemize}
% 
% \small
% \begin{verbatim}
% \documentclass{ouexam}
% 
% \usepackage{graphicx}
% \usepackage{listings}
% 
% \examyear{2001}
% \department{Information Science}
% \papernumber{INFO 321}
% \papertitle{Database Systems}
% \allowcalculators
% 
% \begin{document}
% 
% \lstloadlanguages{ODL,OQL,[Oracle8]SQL,[Oracle8]PLSQL}
% \lstset{basicstyle=\sffamily, stringspaces=false, tabsize=2,
%   indent=1cm, belowskip=0pt, commentstyle=\itshape,
%   labelstyle=\scriptsize, labelsep=5pt, labelstep=1,}
% 
% \maketitlepage
% 
% \begin{examsection}{25}{}{Questions in this section (total 25 marks) 
%   relate to physical database design and tuning.}
% 
% 
% \begin{question}{10}
% 
%   A major U.S. mail order firm is having performance problems with queries
%   on the \textsf{Customer} table in its Oracle8 order-processing database.
%   Consider the following information about the \textsf{Customer} table,
%   then answer the questions below:	\\
% 
%   \textsf{\textbf{Customer}(\underline{customer\_no}, name, address, city,
%   state, country, phone, email, status)}
% 
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item \textsf{customer\_no} is the primary key and because this is an
%     Oracle8 database, a unique B-tree index has been automatically created
%     on this column.
% 
%     \item \textsf{status} is a single character column that holds one of
%     the values `I' (inactive), `B' (bronze), `S' (silver) or `G' (gold).
%     The value of this column is determined by a customer's order history.
% 
%     \item About 10\% of customers are inactive, about 50\% have bronze
%     status, about 35\% have silver status and about 5\% have gold status.
% 
%     \item The average row size is about 200 bytes and there are
%     approximately 5,000,000 rows.
% 
%     \item The \textsf{Customer} table is heavily queried (averaging thirty
%     new queries per minute) by four different groups of employees. Group~1
%     queries only inactive customers, group~2 queries only bronze status
%     customers and groups~3 and~4 both query only silver and gold status
%     customers. Members of any group may query the table at any time and
%     queries often overlap.
% 
%     \item UPDATE, INSERT and DELETE operations on the table are uncommon.
% 
%     \item Very few queries are for individual customers; rather, most
%     queries are based on various combinations of values from
%     \textsf{status}, \textsf{city}, \textsf{state} and \textsf{country}.
%   \end{itemize}\medskip
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}
%     Describe and justify an \emph{index-based} physical tuning solution
%     that will improve the performance of queries on the \textsf{Customer}
%     table. (No code is required.)
%     \begin{marking}
%       Since queries tend to be on combinations of several low-cardinality
%       columns [1] and the table is very large [1], the most effective
%       solution would be to place bitmap indexes on status, city, state and
%       country [1].
% 
%       B-tree indexes on any of the individual columns would not be ideal
%       because of their low cardinality. A possible alternative is a
%       composite B-tree index on all four columns [1 for suggesting this if
%       appropriate], but this is not ideal and would be much larger than
%       the four bitmap indexes [1 for this explanation if appropriate].
%       Hashing is definitely \emph{not} an option, because very few queries
%       are exact match.
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{7}
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{5}\label{nonindex}
%       Assuming that there are two identical fast disks available, describe
%       and justify two alternative \emph{non index-based} physical tuning
%       solutions that will improve the performance of queries on the
%       \textsf{Customer} table. For each solution include details of how
%       the two disks will be used. (No code is required.)
%       \begin{marking}
%         Alternative 1: partition the table across the two disks based on
%         status (four partitions, one for each status value) [1]. This will
%         allow simultaneous parallel access to different parts of the table
%         by the different groups [1]. Since two groups both access silver
%         and gold customers, it makes sense to put the silver customers on
%         disk one and the gold customers on disk two. Bronze customers
%         account for 50\% of the table, so it makes sense to also put them
%         on disk two (as the gold customers are the smallest group), and
%         put the inactive customers on disk one with the silver customers.
%         [1 for any sensible partitioning scheme]
%   
%         Alternative 2: replicate the table across both disks (one replica
%         on each disk) [1]. This will also provide simultaneous parallel
%         access to the data (hard to tell whether this would be better or
%         worse than the partitioning above) [1].
%   
%         Note that any solution must be capable of being implemented in
%         Oracle8.
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
% 
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       Briefly discuss the relative advantages and/or disadvantages of the
%       two alternative solutions you described in part~(\ref{nonindex})
%       above.
%       \begin{marking}
%         The partitioning solution given above doesn't really help with the
%         bronze customer rows---we would need random horizontal
%         partitioning to really help with this, which Oracle8 doesn't
%         support. More generally, Oracle8 does not migrate rows into the
%         correct partition if a customer's status changes, so the data will
%         need to be reloaded occasionally [1].
% 
%         For replication, we have the usual problem of keeping the replicas
%         synchronised if they are both read/write. This is somewhat
%         mitigated by the fact that there are only two copies [1].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
% 
% \newpage
% \begin{question}{10}
%   There are two generic parameters that affect the structure of a B-tree
%   index.
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{6}
%     Identify these two parameters and describe what each parameter
%     specifies. Use diagrams to illustrate your answer.
%     \begin{marking}
%       \emph{Node size} [1] specifies the maximum number of pointers in
%       each index node [1]. Suitable diagram [1].
% 
%       \emph{Percentage fill} [1] specifies the number of pointers in each
%       index node that are allocated when a node is created [1]. In effect,
%       it determines the amount of free space left in each node. Suitable
%       diagram [1].
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
%   
%   \begin{subquestion}{4}
%     For each of the two parameters, discuss the practical effect(s) of:
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       high values of the parameter; and
%       \begin{marking}
%         Large node size reduces the height of the B-tree, resulting in
%         potentially fewer I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. It
%         can however increase the number of rows locked in a single leaf
%         node [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%   
%         High percent fill means that most pointers in a node will be
%         allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves
%         little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values
%         that change [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       low values of the parameter.
%       \begin{marking}
%         Small node size increases the height of the B-tree, resulting in
%         potentially more I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. The
%         number of rows locked in a single leaf node will be reduced
%         [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%   
%         Low percent fill means that most pointers in a node will not be
%         allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves
%         little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values
%         that change [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
%   
%   
% \begin{question}{5}\label{clusterq}
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{2}
%     Define what is meant by the term ``clustering'' in the context of
%     physical database design and tuning, and explain why it is beneficial.
% 
%     \begin{marking}
%       Clustering is the grouping of related rows physically near to each
%       other on disk [1] so that they may be retrieved in as few I/Os as
%       possible (ideally one)---beneficial because of the slowness of disk
%       I/O compared to memory I/O [1].
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
%   
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}\label{clusterqcode}
%     Consider the following Oracle8 SQL table definition:
%     
%     \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{}
% create table enrolment
% (  student_id char(7),
%   paper_code char(7),
%   enrol_year number(4),
%   
%   primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year)
% );
%     \end{lstlisting}
% 
%     The \textsf{Enrolment} table is often queried for all rows relating to
%     a particular student in a particular year (for example, student
%     1234567 in 1998, student 9876543 in 2000, etc.). Write appropriate
%     Oracle8 SQL code that will cluster the rows of the table in such a way
%     as to support these types of query (you do not need to calculate
%     cluster sizes). Relevant Oracle8 syntax diagrams are given on the next
%     page.
%     \begin{marking}
%       \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{}
% create cluster enrolment_cluster (student_id char(7), year number(4));
% 
% create index enrol_cluster_index on cluster enrolment_cluster;
% 
% create table enrolment
% (  student_id char(7),
%   paper_code char(7),
%   enrol_year number(4),
%   
%   primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year)
% ) cluster enrolment_cluster(student_id, enrol_year);
%       \end{lstlisting}
%     \end{marking}
%     [1] each for correct cluster, cluster index and table clustering.
%   \end{subquestion}
% 
% \end{question}
% 
% \end{examsection}
%       .
%       .
%       .
% \end{document}
% \end{verbatim}
% \normalsize
% 
% \begin{figure}
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-1}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-2}}
% 	
% 	\begin{center}
% 		\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-3}}
% 	\end{center}
% 
% 	\caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam}.}
% 	\label{Fig.Example}
% \end{figure}
% 
% \begin{figure}
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-2}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-3}}
% 	
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-4}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-5}}
% 
% 	\caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam} when
% 			\textsf{markingschedule} is used.}
% 	\label{Fig.Example2}
% \end{figure}
% 
% 
% \StopEventually{}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS Revamped and tided up documentation and code.}
% 
% \section{The code}
% 
% \subsection{Preamble}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01]
\ProvidesClass{ouexam}[\ouexamshortdate\space %
                           v\ouexamversion\space Otago %
                           University examination paper]
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\@unsupported}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS New \cs{@unsupported} macro.}
% This macro is used to handle documents written for older versions of
% \textsf{ouexam}. All obsolete macros map to this macro, which prints out an
% appropriate error message. It needs to be defined early because it is used
% to trap use of the obsolete \textsf{multichoice} class option.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@unsupported#1{\ClassError{ouexam}{INCOMPATIBLE (#1): this %
  document was written for an earlier version of ouexam and is %
  not compatible with ouexam v\ouexamversion\space Please use ouexam %
  v1.2 or earlier to process this document. Version 1.2 can be %
  downloaded from the same location as version\space\ouexamversion}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{multichoice}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \textsf{multichoice} class option.}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/04}{NJS Removed support for \textsf{multichoice} option.}
% The \textsf{multichoice} class option is no longer supported, but rather than
% just breaking older documents, we can at least try to present a reasonable
% error message.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{multichoice}{%
  \OptionNotUsed\@unsupported{multichoice class option}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{twoside}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Turned off \textsf{twoside} option.}
% This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of
% the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The \textsf{twoside} option does
% not really make sense, however---all Otago examination papers are printed
% single-sided anyway, and the format is such that two-sided printing would
% look no different. The \textsf{twoside} option is therefore not used in this
% class.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{draft}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New \textsf{draft} class option.}
% \begin{macro}{\if@draft}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New switch for \textsf{draft}.}
% The \textsf{draft} option determines whether the examination is to be printed
% in draft mode (default off). The \cs{if@draft} switch is used to determine
% whether this is in effect (default false). Draft mode has the usual effects
% that you would expect for draft mode in the \textsf{article} class, plus
% \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in the header of every page.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@draft \@draftfalse
\DeclareOption{draft}{\@drafttrue}
% does this need to be passed to the article class?
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} package and turn on the
% \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all included graphics will
% be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the |draft=false| option to the
% \cs{includegraphics} macro. The amount of effort required to fix what is
% a relatively small issue isn't really worth it, so this will not change.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{markingschedule}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New \textsf{markingschedule} class option.}
% \begin{macro}{\if@markingschedule}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New switch for \textsf{markingschedule}.}
% The \textsf{markingschedule} option determines whether marking schedule
% information is printed in addition to the questions (default off). The
% \cs{if@markingschedule} switch is used to determine whether this is in effect
% (default false).
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@markingschedule \@markingschedulefalse
\DeclareOption{markingschedule}{\@markingscheduletrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% All other options are passed directly to the \textsf{article} class:
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
\ProcessOptions
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Changed default point size to 12pt.}
% The defaults for this class are \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside},
% \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. The font size is the only one that might
% need to change.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\LoadClass[onecolumn,oneside,a4paper,12pt]{article}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Required packages}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/08}{NJS Removed requirement for \textsf{calc} and
% \textsf{ifthen} packages.}
% The only required package is the \textsf{verbatim} package, which is used
% to implement the \textsf{marking} environment:
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{verbatim}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% 
% \subsection{Page setup}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
% A4 paper is assumed (since this class is intended only for Otago examination
% papers, this seems a reasonable assumption). The margins are top and bottom
% 2cm, left and right 2.54cm (1in).
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0cm}
\setlength{\topmargin}{-0.54cm}
\setlength{\textwidth}{15.92cm}
\setlength{\textheight}{25.7cm}
\advance\textheight by-\headheight
\advance\textheight by-\headsep
\advance\textheight by-\footskip
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page styles}\label{pagestyles}
%
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS Added support to page styles for \textsf{draft}
% and \textsf{markingschedule} class options.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/15}{NJS Fixed headers so that the page number is always
% centered.}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% The \textsf{plain} page style is based on that in the \textsf{article} class,
% and produces pages with the page number centered at the top, the paper number
% in the top right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom
% right. If semester information is specified, this is included in parentheses
% after the paper code, for example, ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@plain{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that we have to get a bit clever to ensure that the page number is
% properly centered in the page header. The naive solution is just to use
% \cs{hfill}s, but this will cause the page number to shift around depending on
% the length of \cs{@pnumber}. Piet van Oostrum's \textsf{fancyhdr} package will
% do this for us, but it seems a bit of overkill to require this package merely
% so that we can ensure that the page number remains centered. Instead, we've
% borrowed the relevant technique from that class, which draws the left, centre
% and right bits of the header as three overlapping boxes. You just have to be
% careful that the value of \cs{@pnumber} isn't so long that it overwrites the
% page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill
    \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill
    \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber
      \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}}
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \textsf{plain} is the default page style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pagestyle{plain}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\ps@lastpage}
% The \textsf{lastpage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without the
% ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@lastpage{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
    \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill
    \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill
    \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber
      \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}}
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule}
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \textsf{lastpage} should be automatically applied to the last page of the
% document:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{\thispagestyle{lastpage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
% The \textsf{titlepage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without
% the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@titlepage{%
  \def\@oddhead{\@draft}%
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead%
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}%
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Various counters}
% 
% Earlier versions of \textsf{ouexam} used the \textsf{enumerate}
% environment to build questions, which meant that special counters were not
% required. This version of the class, however, uses a different mechanism for
% building questions, so we need to define custom counters for several things.
% 
% \begin{macro}{question}
% \begin{macro}{subquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subquestion} counter.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question number from
% \cs{labelsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(a)''
% instead of ``1(a)''.}
% \begin{macro}{subsubquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubquestion} counter.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS The \texttt{subsubquestion} was incorrectly
% printing as ``(a)'' rather than ``(i)''. Fixed.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question numbers from
% \cs{labelsubsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(i)''
% instead of ``1(a)(i)''.}
% First, we define three counters for the three possible levels of question:
% top-level question, second-level sub-question or third-level sub-sub-question:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{question}
\newcounter{subquestion}[question]
\newcounter{subsubquestion}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% The three question levels are numbered as 1., (a) and (i) respectively, so we
% also need to redefine the associated \cs{the} and \cs{label} macros
% appropriately:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\thequestion}{\arabic{question}}
\newcommand{\labelquestion}{\arabic{question}.}

\renewcommand{\thesubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})}
\newcommand{\labelsubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})}

\renewcommand{\thesubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})}
\newcommand{\labelsubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{examexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examexpected} counter.}
% The |examexpected| counter stores the total expected number of marks for the
% examination, and defaults to 100:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{examexpected}
\setcounter{examexpected}{100}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{examoutof}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examoutof} macro.}
% To specify that an examination is out of some number of marks other than
% 100, use the \cs{examoutof} macro to set the value:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\examoutof}[1]{\setcounter{examexpected}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{sectexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{sectexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{qexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \cs{qexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subqexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subsubqexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubqexpected} counter.}
% The next four counters perform the same function as the |examexpected| counter
% for sections, questions, sub-questions and sub-sub-questions respectively. No
% macros are required to set these values as they are set automatically by the
% question-building environments.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sectexpected}
\newcounter{qexpected}
\newcounter{subqexpected}
\newcounter{subsubqexpected}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{lastexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{lastexpected} counter.}
% The |lastexpected| counter records the expected marks total for the last
% question. This will eventually be used to verify that the marks total for a
% marking schedule equals the marks total for the corresponding question, but
% this hasn't been implemented yet.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{lastexpected}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{examrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{sectrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \texttt{sectrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{qrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{qrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subqrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqrunning} counter.}
% These four counters keep track of the running total of marks for the
% current examination, section, question and subquestion respectively. This
% is later compared against the corresponding expected total. A running total
% is not needed for sub-sub-questions because they do not have sub-parts. The
% |qrunning| and |subqrunning| counters are reset when the associated
% question counters are incremented.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{examrunning}
\setcounter{examrunning}{0}
\newcounter{sectrunning}
\newcounter{qrunning}[question]
\newcounter{subqrunning}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{hassubs}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubs} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{hassubsubs}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubsubs} counter.}
% These two counters are used to track whether questions and
% sub-questions have sub-parts. Counters are used rather than booleans because
% counters are set globally and booleans are not (or at least do not appear to
% be). Both counters reset when the associated question counters are
% incremented.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{hassubs}[question]
\newcounter{hassubsubs}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% At the end of the document, check that the running total of marks for the
% examination matches what we were expecting:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \ifnum\theexamexpected=\theexamrunning
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual number of marks for exam %
      (\theexamrunning) does not match expected number of marks %
      (\theexamexpected)}
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{xsection}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/29}{NJS New \texttt{xsection} counter.}
% Finally, we set up a counter for the section ``number'' and define it so
% that it prints out as an upper case letter rather than a number. We could
% just redefine the |section| counter, but that interferes with the section
% numbering in the documentation, and we can't have that, can we? |:)|
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{xsection}
\setcounter{xsection}{0}
\renewcommand{\thexsection}{\Alph{xsection}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \subsection{Question-building environments and associated items}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{question} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct
% placement of marks in output.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Total marks for a question are now printed only
% if the question has no sub-questions.}
% \begin{environment}{question}
% The \textsf{question} environment specifies a top-level question, and produces
% questions numbered in the form ``1.'', ``2.'', etc. It has one mandatory
% argument, the number of marks allocated to the question, which is used to
% initialise the |qexpected| counter\footnote{If it were not for the fact that
% you can only refer to environment arguments in the environment preamble, the
% \texttt{qexpected} counter would be unnecessary.}. If the argument is left
% empty, default to zero for the number of marks:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{question}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{qexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{qexpected}{#1}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% For each top-level question, we increment the |question| counter, which also
% resets the |hassubs| and |qrunning| counters to zero:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \refstepcounter{question}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The question itself is built using a single-item \textsf{list} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begin{list}{\labelquestion}{}
    \item 
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, the following things happen:
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item If the question has no sub-questions, the value of the |qexpected|
% 	counter is added to |examrunning| and |sectrunning|, and both |qrunning|
% 	and |lastexpected| are set to the value of |qexpected|.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
}{%
    \ifnum\thehassubs=0
      \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
      \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
      \setcounter{qrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	The total number of marks for the question is then printed right-justified
% 	on the line as ``(\emph{m} marks)'' where \emph{m} is the value of the
% 	|qrunning| counter. The environment determines whether to print ``mark'' or
% 	``marks'' automatically, and figures out whether the number of marks will fit
% 	on the last line of the question or needs to be placed on the next line.
% 	The code for handling the line breaking is derived from an example on page
% 	106 of \emph{The \TeX{}book}:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
      \hfil(\theqrunning~\ifnum\theqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi)
      \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item If the question \emph{does} have sub-questions, then |qrunning|,
% 	|examrunning| and |sectrunning| have already been set by the various
% 	sub-environments. The value of |qrunning| is then compared with
% 	|qexpected|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number
% 	of marks for the question is \emph{not} printed in this case.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \else
      \ifnum\theqrunning=\theqexpected
      \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\theqrunning) for %
          question \thequestion\space doesn't match expected mark %
          (\theqexpected)}
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item |lastexpected| is set to the value of |qexpected| so it can be used
% 	in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{qexpected}}
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \end{enumerate}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{environment}{subquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subquestion} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement
% of marks in output.}
% The \textsf{subquestion} environment is the analogue of \textsf{question} for
% sub-questions. On initialisation, it sets |subqexpected| to the value of the
% mandatory argument (defaulting to zero if the argument is empty), increments
% the |hassubs| counter so that the enclosing \textsf{question} environment can
% react appropriately, increments |subquestion| (thus resetting |hassubsubs| and
% |subqrunning| to zero) and opens a single-item list with numbering of the form
% ``(a)'', ``(b)'', etc.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subquestion}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subqexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}\fi
  \setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}
  \addtocounter{hassubs}{1}
  \refstepcounter{subquestion}
  \begin{list}{\labelsubquestion}{}
    \item 
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, if performs similar checks to the
% \textsf{question} environment. If the sub-question has no sub-sub-questions,
% the value of |subqexpected| is added to |qrunning| and |sectrunning|:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\thehassubsubs=0
      \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \setcounter{subqrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Then the number of marks for the sub-question are typeset in a similar manner
% to the \textsf{question} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
      \hfil(\thesubqrunning~\ifnum\thesubqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi)
      \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% If the sub-question \emph{does} have sub-sub-questions, check the running total
% against the expected number and raise an error if they don't match.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \else
      \ifnum\thesubqrunning=\thesubqexpected
      \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesubqrunning) for %
          question \thesubquestion\space doesn't match expected mark %
          (\thesubqexpected)}
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, set |lastexpected| to the value of |qexpected| so it can be used
% in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subqexpected}}
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{environment}{subsubquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subsubquestion} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement
% of marks in output.}
% This is similar to both \textsf{question} and \textsf{subquestion}, and
% generates an appropriately numbered sub-sub-question (``(i)'', ``(ii)'', etc.).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subsubquestion}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{#1}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Increment |hassubsubs| so that the enclosing \textsf{subquestion} environment
% can react appropriately:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \addtocounter{hassubsubs}{1}
  \refstepcounter{subsubquestion}
  \begin{list}{\labelsubsubquestion}{}
    \item 
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Closing this environment is a bit simpler than the previous two because we
% don't need to check whether the sub-sub-question has any sub-components (this
% never happens). All we have to do is set the appropriate counters and typeset
% the number of marks.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{subqrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
    \hfil(\thesubsubqexpected~\ifnum\thesubsubqexpected=1 mark
                              \else marks\fi)
    \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% 
% Note that none of these three environments check whether they are correctly
% nested (i.e., \textsf{subsubquestion} within \textsf{subquestion} within
% \textsf{question}).
% 
% 
% \subsection{Draft examination printing}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\@marking}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS New \cs{@draft} macro.}
% Specifying the \textsf{draft} option causes \textsf{ouexam} to print
% \fbox{DRAFT} in large letters in the header of every page. This is drawn by
% the \cs{@draft} macro, which is included in the page header definition of
% all the page styles for this class (see
% \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref*{pagestyles}}). \textbf{Note:} Because
% the \cs{@draft} macro is included in the page header, it will usually
% overflow the page boundaries, causing ``|Overfull \vbox|'' warnings. Note
% the extra set of braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@draft\def\@draft{{\Huge\fbox{DRAFT}}}
\else\let\@draft\@empty
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Marking schedule information}
% 
% \begin{environment}{marking}
% \begin{macro}{\@markingschedule}
% \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New \textsf{marking} environment for including
% answers and/or marking schedule information.}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS Now prints ``MARKING SCHEDULE'' at the bottom
% of every page if the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified.}
% The \textsf{marking} environment allows the specification of marking
% schedule information in the same location as the questions. If the
% \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified, marking schedule
% information is printed in italics. In addition, \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} is
% printed in large letters in the footer of every page. This is drawn by the
% \cs{@markingschedule} macro, which is included in the page footer
% definition of all the page styles for this class (see
% \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref*{pagestyles}}). Note the extra set of
% braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@markingschedule
  \newenvironment{marking}{\itshape}{\normalfont}
  \def\@markingschedule{{\Huge\fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE}}}
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Normally \textsf{marking} just maps to the \textsf{comment} environment from
% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf's \textsf{verbatim} package, i.e., marking information is not
% printed:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\marking\comment
  \let\endmarking\endcomment
  \let\@markingschedule\@empty
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Section handling}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS new \textsf{examsection} environment.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{@defsecinst} macro.}
% \begin{environment}{examsection}
% \begin{macro}{\@defsecinst}
% The \textsf{examsection} environment specifies a major section of an
% examination paper. Sections are sequentially numbered ``A'', ``B'', etc. The
% environment has three arguments:
% 
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item The expected number of marks for the section.
% 
% 	\item The instructions for this section. This defaults to ``ANSWER ALL
%	QUESTIONS.'' if left blank. To change the default text, redefine the
%	\cs{@defsecinst} macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@defsecinst{ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item A description of the contents of the section which may be left blank.
% \end{enumerate}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{examsection}[3]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Every section begins on a new page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newpage
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the argument for the number of marks is left empty, default to zero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{sectexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{sectexpected}{#1}\fi
  \refstepcounter{xsection}
  \setcounter{sectrunning}{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in
% \cs{large} size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}}
  \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \def\@usersecinst{#2}
  \ifx\@usersecinst\@empty\@defsecinst\else\@usersecinst\fi\par
  \def\@usersectopic{#3}
  \ifx\@usersectopic\@empty\else\par\noindent\@usersectopic\fi \\
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, the value of |sectrunning| is compared against
% |sectexpected|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number
% marks for the section is printed in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL
% \emph{m} MARKS]}'' where \emph{m} is the value of |sectrunning|.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\thesectrunning=\thesectexpected
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesectrunning) for section %
      \thexsection\space doesn't match expected mark (\thesectexpected)}
  \fi
  \bigskip\hfill\textbf{[SECTION \thexsection\ TOTAL %
                              \thesectrunning\ MARKS]}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newsection}
% \textbf{[DEPRECATED]} The \cs{newsection} macro generates a new examination
% section, appropriately numbered. The optional argument contains instructions
% for answering the questions in the new section, and defaults to ``ANSWER ALL
% QUESTIONS''. This macro is included only for backwards compatibility with
% previous versions. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro
% and should be used in new documents. This macro will eventually be deleted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newsection}[1][ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.]{%
  \ClassWarning{ouexam}{DEPRECATED: The \protect\newsection\space %
      macro is deprecated; use the examsection environment instead}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Every section begins on a new page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newpage
  \refstepcounter{xsection}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in
% \cs{large} size. Note that sections are ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}}
  \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  #1
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Title page generation}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\examyear}
% \begin{macro}{\@year}
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't
% know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.}
% The \cs{examyear} macro specifies the year in which the examination is being
% held. It redefines the \cs{@year} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\examyear}[1]{\def\@year{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This macro is required:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@year{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\examyear\space was specified}\@eha
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\department}
% \begin{macro}{\@dept}
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't
% know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.}
% The \cs{department} macro specifies the name of the department, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@dept} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\department}[1]{\def\@dept{#1}}
\def\@dept{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\department\space was specified}\@eha
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\papernumber}
% \begin{macro}{\@pnumber}
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't
% know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.}
% The \cs{papernumber} macro specifies the paper number, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@pnumber} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\papernumber}[1]{\def\@pnumber{#1}}
\def\@pnumber{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papernumber\space was specified}\@eha
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\papertitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@ptitle}
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Put back \@eha at end of the \ClassError. Don't
% know what this does, but the macro crashes without it there.}
% The \cs{papertitle} macro specifies the title of the paper, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@ptitle} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\papertitle}[1]{\def\@ptitle{#1}}
\def\@ptitle{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papertitle\space was specified}\@eha
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\semester}
% \begin{macro}{\@semester}
% \changes{2.0.2}{2002/08/22}{NJS Added full-year support to \cs{semester}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/14}{NJS Rewrote \cs{semester} to support summer school
% and special exams.}
% The \cs{semester} macro specifies which semester the examination is for.
% Legal values for the argument are ``1'', ``2'', ``SS'' for summer school,
% ``FY'' for full-year or ``SP'' for a special examination---anything else is
% ignored.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ONE{1}
\def\@TWO{2}
\def\@SS{SS}
\def\@FY{FY}
\def\@SP{SP}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This macro redefines the \cs{@semester} macro which is used in
% \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\semester}[1]{%
  \def\@sem{#1}
  \ifx\@sem\@ONE\def\@semester{Semester One}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@TWO\def\@semester{Semester Two}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@SS\def\@semester{Summer School}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@FY\def\@semester{Full Year}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@SP\def\@semester{Special Examination}
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{invalid value `#1' for %
    \protect\semester; valid values are `1', `2', `SS', %
    `FY' and `SP'. No semester information will be printed}
  \fi\fi\fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{semester} is optional---if you omit it or give it an invalid argument,
% \cs{@semester} remains empty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@semester\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\timeallowed}
% \begin{macro}{\@hours}
% The \cs{timeallowed} macro specifies the length of the examination in hours.
% It redefines the \cs{@hours} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\timeallowed}[1]{\def\@hours{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{timeallowed} is optional---if you omit it, \cs{@hours} defaults to ``3'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@hours{3}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{num.pages}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed label from \cs{page.last}.}
% There is no macro to specify the number of pages in the examination because
% it is done automatically by inserting a \cs{newlabel} that refers to the last
% page directly into the |.aux| file:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{num.pages}{{}{\thepage}}}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This label is then referenced in \cs{@maketitlepage}.
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{num.questions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \cs{num.questions} label representing the
% number of questions.}
% Similarly, there is no macro to specify the number of questions in the
% examination. This is calculated using the same method as for the number of
% pages:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \immediate\write\@auxout{%
    \string\newlabel{num.questions}{{}{\thequestion}}
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\instructions}
% \begin{macro}{\@instructions}
% The \cs{instructions} macro specifies instructions on how candidates should
% answer questions. It redefines the \cs{@instructions} macro that is used in
% \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@instructions{Answer \underline{ALL} questions.}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{instructions} is optional. If you omit it, \cs{@instructions} defaults
% to ``Answer \underline{ALL} questions.'' 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instructions}[1]{\def\@instructions{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\material}
% \begin{macro}{\@material}
% The \cs{material} macro lets specifies any additional material that candidates
% are provided in addition to the examination paper itself, and is optional.
% It redefines the \cs{@material} macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@material\@empty
\newcommand{\material}[1]{\def\@material{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\allowcalculators}
% \begin{macro}{\@calculators}
% The \cs{allowcalculators} macro specifies whether or not calculators are
% allowed in the examination. If \cs{allowcalculators} is omitted, \cs{@calculators}
% defaults to ``may not'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@calculators{may not}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Issuing an \cs{allowcalculators} changes the redefines \cs{@calculators} to
% ``may'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\allowcalculators}{\def\@calculators{may}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{@calculators} is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\copiesof}
% \begin{macro}{\@copiesof}
% The \cs{copiesof} macro specifies any material that candidates are allowed to
% bring into the examination, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@copiesof}
% macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@copiesof\@empty
\newcommand{\copiesof}[1]{\def\@copiesof{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\otherinstructions}
% \begin{macro}{\@otherinst}
% The \cs{otherinstructions} macro specifies any other instructions not covered
% by any of the above, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@otherinst}
% macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@otherinst\@empty
\newcommand{\otherinstructions}[1]{\def\@otherinst{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlepage}
% The \cs{maketitlepage} macro is the \textsf{ouexam} analogue of \cs{maketitle}.
% It takes all of the information provided by the above macros and generates a
% properly formatted examination title page. If you want to design your own title
% page styles, redefine \cs{@maketitlepage} (this is not normally recommended
% however).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitlepage}{\@maketitlepage}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitlepage}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed macro from \cs{maketitlepage}.}
% The \cs{@maketitlepage} macro generates an examination title page that
% meets the Otago University requirements for final examination papers. You
% can redefine this if you want to change the format, but normally you would
% not do this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@maketitlepage{%
  \thispagestyle{titlepage}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The header information for the examination is printed centered at the top
% of the page. The department, paper number and paper title (and the semester
% information if required) are placed inside a double box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begin{center}
    {\Large \textbf{UNIVERSITY OF OTAGO EXAMINATIONS \@year}}
    \\[\baselineskip]
    \fbox{\framebox[\linewidth]{%
      \begin{tabular}{c}
        \\
        {\large \@dept} \\
        \\
        {\large Paper \@pnumber} \\
        \\
        {\large \@ptitle} \\
        \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\@semester \\ \fi
        \\
      \end{tabular}%
    }}
    \mbox{}\\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Next, the time allowed for completing the examination:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \textbf{(TIME ALLOWED: \@hours\ HOURS)}
    \\[\baselineskip]
  \end{center}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The number of pages is automatically calculated, as described earlier. All we
% need to do is reference the |num.pages| label that we put into the |.aux|
% file:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{This examination paper comprises \pageref{num.pages}
             pages.}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out the instructions for answering questions:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Candidates should answer questions as follows:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@instructions\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out any provided material:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{The following material is provided:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@material\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out use of calculators section:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Use of calculators:} \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}
    Electronic calculators \@calculators\ be used in this examination.
    \\[\baselineskip]
    Please note: where the use of calculators is permitted, these
    must be non-pro\-gram\-ma\-ble, hand-held calculators without
    alphabetic key pads.
  \end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip]
  \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.)
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out anything that candidates are allowed to bring:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Candidates are permitted copies of:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@copiesof\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.)
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out other instructions, and finish.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Other Instructions:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@otherinst\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
 
  \newpage
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Obsolete macros and environments}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS All \textsf{multichoice} macros and environments
% made obsolete.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \cs{markingschedule}, \cs{marks}, \cs{totalmarks}
% macros made obsolete.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions},
% \textsf{subsubquestions} environments made obsolete.}
% The following macros and environments are no longer supported as of version
% 2.0. Documents that use these macros can be processed using ouexam v1.2 or
% earlier. The obsolete multiple-choice examination support is dealt with
% during option processing, so we can ignore the obsolete multiple-choice
% macros.
% 
% \begin{environment}{questions}
% \begin{environment}{subquestions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is
% active.}
% \begin{environment}{subsubquestions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is
% active.}
% \begin{macro}{markingschedule}
% \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New macro to turn marking information on and
% off.}
% The \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions} and \textsf{subsubquestions}
% environments have been replaced by the \textsf{question},
% \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion} environments respectively.
%   \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{questions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{questions environment}}}{}
\newenvironment{subquestions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{subquestions environment}}}{}
\newenvironment{subsubquestions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{subsubquestions environment}}}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{markingschedule} macro has been replaced by the
% \textsf{markingschedule} class option. We can't map this to the
% \cs{@unsupported} macro because \cs{markingschedule} occurs in the document
% preamble. Mapping it to \cs{@unsupported} causes \TeX\ to blow up for some
% reason. It's safe enough to ignore it.
%   \begin{macrocode}
\let\markingschedule\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\marks}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS This macro now increments the \texttt{marks}
% counter.}
% \begin{macro}{\totalmarks}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Removed the parameter for the number of marks;
% Both these macros have been replaced by automatic calculations within the
% question-building environments.}
% The \cs{marks} macro has been replaced by the argument to the various
% question-building environments. The \cs{totalmarks} macro has been replaced
% by automatic calculations within these environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\marks}[1]{\@unsupported{marks macro}}
\newcommand{\totalmarks}{\@unsupported{totalmarks macro}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
% 
% \Finale
% 
% \PrintChanges

\def\filedate{30 January 2002}
\def\fileversion{2.0.1}
\def\shortdate{2002/04/30}
% \iffalse meta-comment
%%
%% ouexam.dtx Copyright 1999--2002 Nigel Stanger and University of Otago
%% 
%% You may use this package freely, and also distribute it
%% provided that you don't change it, make any money off
%% it or pretend that you wrote it.
%%
%<*driver>
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
\usepackage{doc}
\DisableCrossrefs
\CodelineNumbered
\RecordChanges

\usepackage{graphicx}
% change hyperref options as required
\usepackage[dvips,colorlinks,pdfpagemode=None,a4paper,urlcolor=blue,
            linkcolor=red,pdfauthor={Nigel Stanger}]{hyperref}

\title{The \textsf{ouexam} document class, v\fileversion}
\author{Nigel Stanger\\nstanger@infoscience.otago.ac.nz}
\date{\filedate}

\begin{document}
\maketitle
\DocInput{ouexam.dtx}
\end{document}
%</driver>
%
% \fi
%
%% \CheckSum{760}
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    $     Right paren   $
%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
%%
%
% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
% 
% \changes{1.0}{1999/04/15}{Initial version.}
%
% \begin{abstract}
% This document class allows you to create Otago University final
% examination papers using \LaTeXe\@. It implements the major formatting
% requirements specified by the University, provides useful
% macros to ease the process of building the title page and automatically
% deals with fiddly little issues such as question and section numbering,
% the number of pages in the paper, printing ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the
% bottom right corner of every page except the last one and ensuring that the
% total number of marks for a question adds up to the expected number.
% \end{abstract}
% 
% 
% \tableofcontents
% 
% 
% \section{Overview}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/11}{NJS Added note on backwards compatibility.}
% \subsection{Important note on backwards compatibility}
% 
% Version 2.0 of \textsf{ouexam} introduces several major changes from earlier
% versions. Consequently, documents created using an earlier version of
% \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{incompatible} with version 2.0 or later. Versions 2.0
% and greater of \textsf{ouexam} will detect attempts to process version 1.x
% document and display an error message.
% 
% The older version (1.2) is still available and can be downloaded from the same
% location as the current version. To process older version documents, just copy
% the version 1.2 |ouexam.cls| file into the same directory as the document file.
% \TeX\ searches the current directory first, so this copy will take precedence
% over any other installed version of \textsf{ouexam}.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Class options}
%
% This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of
% the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The default options are
% \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside}, \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}.
% Normally the only one you might want to change is the last one.
% In addition, \textsf{ouexam} accepts the following ``native'' class options:
% \begin{description}
% 	\item[\textsf{draft}] \DescribeMacro{draft} This option has the usual
% 	effects that you would expect for \textsf{draft} mode in the
% 	\textsf{article} class, plus \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in
% 	the header of every page. Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx}
% 	package and turn on the \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all
% 	included graphics will be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the
% 	|draft=false| option to \cs{includegraphics}.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{markingschedule}] \DescribeMacro{markingschedule} This option
% 	Rather than write a separate marking schedule for an examination paper, you
% 	can use the \textsf{marking} environment to embed marking information
% 	within questions (see 
% 	\hyperref[Sec:Questions:Marking]{section~\ref*{Sec:Questions:Marking}}).
% 	By default this information is not printed (for obvious reasons!), but
% 	when it comes time to print a marking schedule for the examination,
% 	including the \textsf{markingschedule} class option in the
% 	\cs{usepackage} command will cause \textsf{ouexam} to print the hidden
% 	content. It will also print \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} in the footer of
% 	every page.
% \end{description}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Required packages}
% 
% This class requires the \textsf{verbatim} package in order to implement
% the marking schedule functionality.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page margins}
% 
% This class assumes A4 paper. You will probably get weird results if you try
% to do anything different. The margins are set up as follows: top and bottom
% 2cm (headers and footers are inside this margin), left and right 2.54cm (1in).
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page styles}
% 
% There are three page styles defined in this class:
% \begin{description}
% 	\item[\textsf{plain}] \DescribeMacro{plain} This is a slight modification
% 	of the \textsf{plain} page style from \textsf{article}. It produces pages
% 	that have the page number centered at the top, the paper number in the top
% 	right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom right. This
% 	is the default page style.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{lastpage}] \DescribeMacro{lastpage} This is similar to
% 	\textsf{plain} but without the ``\textbf{TURN OVER}''. It is used for the
% 	last page of the examination. You normally will not have to use this
% 	yourself---the class should take care of it automatically. The class does
% 	however occasionally seem to get confused, so there may times when you have
% 	to set the page style of the last page manually. It will be fairly obvious
% 	when you need to do this---the usual effect is that the last page
% 	has``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' printed on it when it should not.
% 	
% 	\item[\textsf{titlepage}] \DescribeMacro{titlepage} This is similar to
% 	\textsf{plain} but without the page header, and is used for the title page
% 	of the paper. As with \textsf{lastpage}, you will normally not use this
% 	yourself, because the \cs{maketitlepage} macro handles this automatically
% 	(see \hyperref[Sec:TitlePage]{section~\ref*{Sec:TitlePage}}).
% \end{description}
% 
% 
% \section{Writing an examination paper}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Sections}
% \label{Sec:Sections}
% 
% Examination papers may have multiple sections, ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots.
% Rather than redefine the existing section macros, this class defines an
% \DescribeEnv{examsection} \textsf{examsection} environment\footnote{Note that
% the old \cs{newsection} macro has been retained for backwards compatibility
% with earlier development versions of \textsf{ouexam}. The \textsf{examsection}
% environment replaces this macro and should be used in all new documents.} that
% generates a new section. The \textsf{examsection} environment has three
% mandatory arguments:
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item The expected number of marks for the question. If you leave this
% 	argument empty it defaults to zero. \textsf{ouexam} keeps a running total
% 	of the \emph{actual} number of marks encountered within a section, which is
% 	compared with the value of this argument when the environment is closed.
% 	An error is raised if the values are not equal. The running total is also
% 	typeset right-justified in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 20 MARKS]}''
% 	as an additional verification.
% 
% 	
% 	\item Instructions for answering questions in this section (such as
% 	``Answer any TWO questions.''). If you leave this argument empty it
% 	defaults to ``ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.''.
% 	
% 	\item A description of the topic of the section. This can be left
% 	empty.
% \end{enumerate}
% Every section begins on a new page, and the section title is formatted as
% ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in \cs{large} size. For example:	\\
% 
% \noindent|\begin{examsection}{25}{}{These questions are remarkably boring.}|	\\
% \hspace*{1cm}\vdots	\\
% |\end{examsection}|	\\
% 
% \noindent will produce the following (assuming that the actual number of
% marks in the question is correct):
% 
% \begin{center}
% 	\fbox{%
% 	\begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth}
% 		{\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~A}}}	\\[0.5\baselineskip]
% 		ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.	\\
% 		These questions are remarkably boring.	\\
% 		\hspace*{2cm}\vdots	\\
% 		\mbox{}\hfill\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL 25 MARKS]}
% 	\end{minipage}
% 	}
% \end{center}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Questions}
% \label{Sec:Questions}
% 
% \textsf{ouexam} provides three environments for building examination
% questions: \DescribeEnv{question} \textsf{question},
% \DescribeEnv{subquestion} \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion},
% which correspond to top-level questions, parts of questions, and
% \DescribeEnv{subsubquestion} sub-parts of questions respectively. They
% produce questions that are numbered according to University examination
% formatting requirements. Note that questions are normally numbered
% sequentially throughout the entire paper regardless of any section
% boundaries.
% 
% All three environments have a single mandatory argument which is the
% expected number of marks for the question, part or sub-part. If this
% argument is left empty it will default to zero. This argument works in much
% the same way as the first argument to the \textsf{examsection} environment
% (see \hyperref[Sec:Sections]{section~\ref*{Sec:Sections}}): \textsf{ouexam}
% keeps a running total of the number of marks encountered within each
% question part and sub-part, and compares this total with the expected value
% when the environment closes. Where appropriate, the running total is
% typeset right-justified in the form ``(5 marks)''. For example:
% \begin{verbatim}
% \begin{question}{5}
%   \begin{subquestion}{2}
%     Why is the sky blue?
%   \end{subquestion}
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}
%     Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink.
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
% \begin{question}{1}
%   Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''.
% \end{question}
% \end{verbatim}
% 
% \newpage\noindent will produce the following:
% \begin{center}
% 	\fbox{%
% 	\begin{minipage}{0.9\columnwidth}
% 		\begin{enumerate}
% 			\item
% 			\begin{enumerate}
% 				\item Why is the sky blue? \hfill (2 marks)
% 
% 				\item Explain in detail how the sky can be made pink. \hfill (3
% 				marks)
% 			\end{enumerate}
% 
% 			\item Define the term ``floccinaucinihilipilification''. \hfill (1
% 			mark)
% 		\end{enumerate}
% 	\end{minipage}
% 	}
% \end{center}
% 
% The \textsf{question} environments handle formatting of marks totals
% automatically, including considerations such as:
% \begin{itemize}
% 	\item whether or not to print the number of marks for a question at all
% 	(they should not be printed if the question has sub-parts);
% 	
% 	\item whether to print ``mark'' or ``marks'' (e.g., question 2 above); and
% 	
% 	\item where to position the number of marks relative to the question,
% 	depending on how full the last line of the question is.
% \end{itemize}
%
% 
% \subsection{Marking schedule information}
% \label{Sec:Questions:Marking}
% 
% Rather than writing a separate marking schedule for an examination paper,
% you can use the \DescribeEnv{marking} \textsf{marking} environment to embed
% marking information within questions. By default this information is not
% printed (for obvious reasons!), but when it comes time to print a marking
% schedule for the examination, use the \textsf{markingschedule} class option
% to print the hidden content. The marking information will be printed in
% \emph{italics} to differentiate it from the main body of the examination,
% and \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} will also be printed in the footer of every
% page.
% 
% 
% \subsection{The title page}
% \label{Sec:TitlePage}
% 
% This class defines a collection of macros that let you fill in the various
% parts of the examination title page. This is analogous to the process you use
% to generate the title of a document in, for example, the \textsf{article} class
% (using \cs{title}, \cs{author}, \cs{date} and \cs{maketitle}). That is, you
% issue the macros described below in the document preamble, then issue a
% \cs{maketitlepage} in the document body.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\examyear} \cs{examyear} macro lets you specify the year
% in which the examination is being held, for example, |\examyear{1999}|. This
% macro is mandatory.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\department} \cs{department} macro lets you specify the
% name of the department that produced the examination paper, for example,
% |\department{Information| |Science}|. This macro is mandatory.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\papernumber} \cs{papernumber} macro lets you specify the
% paper number that the examination is for, for example,
% |\papernumber{COMP 101}|. This macro is mandatory. \textbf{Warning:} Do not make
% the paper number string too long or it will overlap the page number. Be
% particularly careful when you specify semester information using \cs{semester},
% because this is appended to the paper number in the page header. For example,
% if you specify |\papernumber{COMP 101}| and |\semester{2}|, the header will
% contain ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)'' rather than just ``COMP 101''. The worst
% case you will need to consider in such situations is a special examination,
% which inserts the text ``(Special Examination)'' after the paper number.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\papertitle} \cs{papertitle} macro lets you specify the
% title of the paper, for example, 
% |\papertitle{Systems Analysis and Design Methods}|. This macro is mandatory.
% 
% Some papers are offered in more than one semester. The
% \DescribeMacro{\semester} \cs{semester} macro lets you specify which semester
% the examination is for. The argument can be either ``1'' or ``2'' for semesters
% 1 and 2, ``SS'' for summer school or ``SP'' for a special examination, for
% example, |\semester{2}|. Invalid values for the argument cause a warning to be
% raised. This macro is optional---if you omit it, no semester information is
% generated.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\timeallowed} \cs{timeallowed} macro lets you specify the
% length of the examination in hours, for example, |\timeallowed{2}|. This
% macro is optional---if you omit it, it defaults to three (3) hours.
% 
% If calculators are allowed in the examination, use the
% \DescribeMacro{\allowcalculators} \cs{allowcalculators} macro. This macro is
% optional---if you omit it, a sentence is printed saying that calculators
% are \emph{not} allowed.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\instructions} \cs{instructions} macro lets you specify
% instructions on how candidates should complete the
% examination, for example, |\instructions{Answer ALL| |questions.}|. This macro
% is optional. Note that the content of the instructions can be just about
% anything. It is up to you to control formatting, such as how you want lines
% broken, etc. This also true of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and
% \cs{otherinstructions} macros described below.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\material} \cs{material} macro lets you specify any
% additional material that candidates are provided in addition to the
% examination paper itself, for example, |\material{SQL schema definition}|.
% This macro is optional.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\copiesof} \cs{copiesof} macro lets you specify any
% material that candidates are allowed to bring into the examination, for
% example, |\copiesof{McFadden &| |Hoffer, 5th edition}|. This macro is
% optional.
% 
% The \DescribeMacro{\otherinstructions} \cs{otherinstructions} macro lets you
% specify any other instructions not covered by any of the above, for example,
% |\otherinstructions{No smoking| |allowed.}|. This macro is optional.
% 
% Once you have specified the content of the title page using the above
% macros, you simply issue a \DescribeMacro{\maketitlepage} \cs{maketitlepage}
% to generate the front page of the examination (cf. \cs{maketitle}). The title
% page generated meets University formatting requirements.
% Note that the number of pages in the examination paper is generated
% and inserted into the title page automatically---you do not need to specify
% it manually.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Miscellaneous}
% 
% Most examinationss are marked out of 100, and \textsf{ouexam} defaults to
% this. However, if you want an examination that is marked out of some other
% number, for example, 90 marks, you can specify this using the
% \DescribeMacro{\examoutof} \cs{examoutof} macro. Thus, |\examoutof{90}|
% will set the expected number of marks for the examination to 90. This value
% is used by \textsf{ouexam} to verify that the marks for all the questions
% add up to the expected number of marks for the examination.
% 
% 
% \section{Errors and warnings}
% 
% In this section are described the error messages and warning produced by
% \textsf{ouexam}, and the reasons why they occur.
% 
% 
% \subsection{Error messages}
% 
% \noindent\texttt{INCOMPATIBLE (\ldots): this document was written for an
% earlier}	\\
% \texttt{version of ouexam \ldots}	\\
% You are trying to use v2.0 or later of \textsf{ouexam} with a document that
% was written for \textsf{ouexam} v1.2 or earlier. Versions 2.0 and later of
% \textsf{ouexam} are \emph{fundamentally incompatible} with earlier
% versions. The only solutions here are either to revert to \textsf{ouexam}
% v1.2 or earlier (you can put a copy of the class file in the same directory
% as the document), or rewrite the document to conform to the current version
% of \textsf{ouexam}. You should be able to download a copy of v1.2 from the
% same location that you found the current version.	\\
% 	
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{examyear} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{department} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papernumber} was specified}	\\
% \noindent\texttt{no \cs{papertitle} was specified}	\\
% You have not specified one of these macros. All four of these macros are
% mandatory and must be included in the preamble of any \textsf{ouexam}
% document.	\\
% 
% 
% \subsection{Warnings}
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual number of marks for exam (\ldots) does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{number of marks (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for the whole examination (calculated
% by summing the marks for all the questions) is not the same as the expected
% total for the examination. Adjust the marks for the questions until the
% totals match.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for section \ldots\ does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{mark (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for a particular section (calculated by
% summing the marks for all the questions in that section) is not the same as
% the expected total for that section. Adjust the marks for the questions in
% the section concerned until the totals match. The section number is given
% in the warning.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{actual mark (\ldots) for question \ldots\ does not match
% expected}	\\
% \texttt{mark (\ldots)}	\\
% The actual number of marks supplied for a particular question (calculated
% by summing the marks of all its sub-parts) is not the same as the expected
% total for that question. Adjust the marks for the sub-parts of the
% question until the totals match. The question number is given
% in the warning.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{DEPRECATED: The \cs{newsection} macro is deprecated; use
% the}	\\
% \texttt{examsection environment instead}	\\
% The \cs{newsection} macro is a hangover from earlier versions of
% \textsf{ouexam}, and has been left in v2.0 for backwards compatibility with
% some documents that use it. The entire sectioning mechanism was rewritten
% from scratch for v2.0, so this macro is now deprecated and will eventually
% disappear. You should use the \textsf{examsection} environment
% instead.	\\
% 
% \noindent\texttt{invalid value `\ldots' for \cs{semester}; valid values are
% `1', `2', `SS'}	\\*
% \texttt{and `SP'. No semester information will be printed}	\\*
% You have given an invalid value as the argument to the \cs{semester} macro.
% The allowed values are `1' (semester one), `2' (semester two), `SS' (summer
% school) and `SP' (special examination). Any other values will be ignored.
% Note that these are case-sensitive, for example, `sp' is invalid. 	\\
% 
% 
% \section{Example}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/25}{NJS Updated example to conform to 2.0 changes.}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Updated example to conform to 1.1 changes.}
% The code given below is for the first three pages of the INFO~321 2001
% final examination. The output produced by this source is shown in
% \hyperref[Fig.Example]{figure~\ref*{Fig.Example} on
% page~\pageref*{Fig.Example}}. Particular points to note in this example
% are:
% 
% \begin{itemize}
% 
% 	\item The number of hours is not specified, so it defaults to three.
% 
% 	\item This examination allows calculators.
% 	
% 	\item The \textsf{listings} package is used to typeset code listings.
% 
% 	\item The argument of the \cs{instructions} macro can be just about
% 	anything, as can the arguments of the \cs{material}, \cs{copiesof} and
% 	\cs{otherinstructions} macros. In this example, the \cs{instructions}
% 	macro has been omitted, causing \textsf{ouexam} to output the default
%	instructions.
% 
% 	\item Marking schedule information has been embedded within the
% 	questions. \hyperref[Fig.Example2]{Figure~\ref*{Fig.Example2} on
% 	page~\pageref*{Fig.Example2}} shows the output produced by this source
% 	when the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is used.
% 
% \end{itemize}
% 
% \small
% \begin{verbatim}
% \documentclass{ouexam}
% 
% \usepackage{graphicx}
% \usepackage{listings}
% 
% \examyear{2001}
% \department{Information Science}
% \papernumber{INFO 321}
% \papertitle{Database Systems}
% \allowcalculators
% 
% \begin{document}
% 
% \lstloadlanguages{ODL,OQL,[Oracle8]SQL,[Oracle8]PLSQL}
% \lstset{basicstyle=\sffamily, stringspaces=false, tabsize=2,
%   indent=1cm, belowskip=0pt, commentstyle=\itshape,
%   labelstyle=\scriptsize, labelsep=5pt, labelstep=1,}
% 
% \maketitlepage
% 
% \begin{examsection}{25}{}{Questions in this section (total 25 marks) 
%   relate to physical database design and tuning.}
% 
% 
% \begin{question}{10}
% 
%   A major U.S. mail order firm is having performance problems with queries
%   on the \textsf{Customer} table in its Oracle8 order-processing database.
%   Consider the following information about the \textsf{Customer} table,
%   then answer the questions below:	\\
% 
%   \textsf{\textbf{Customer}(\underline{customer\_no}, name, address, city,
%   state, country, phone, email, status)}
% 
%   \begin{itemize}
%     \item \textsf{customer\_no} is the primary key and because this is an
%     Oracle8 database, a unique B-tree index has been automatically created
%     on this column.
% 
%     \item \textsf{status} is a single character column that holds one of
%     the values `I' (inactive), `B' (bronze), `S' (silver) or `G' (gold).
%     The value of this column is determined by a customer's order history.
% 
%     \item About 10\% of customers are inactive, about 50\% have bronze
%     status, about 35\% have silver status and about 5\% have gold status.
% 
%     \item The average row size is about 200 bytes and there are
%     approximately 5,000,000 rows.
% 
%     \item The \textsf{Customer} table is heavily queried (averaging thirty
%     new queries per minute) by four different groups of employees. Group~1
%     queries only inactive customers, group~2 queries only bronze status
%     customers and groups~3 and~4 both query only silver and gold status
%     customers. Members of any group may query the table at any time and
%     queries often overlap.
% 
%     \item UPDATE, INSERT and DELETE operations on the table are uncommon.
% 
%     \item Very few queries are for individual customers; rather, most
%     queries are based on various combinations of values from
%     \textsf{status}, \textsf{city}, \textsf{state} and \textsf{country}.
%   \end{itemize}\medskip
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}
%     Describe and justify an \emph{index-based} physical tuning solution
%     that will improve the performance of queries on the \textsf{Customer}
%     table. (No code is required.)
%     \begin{marking}
%       Since queries tend to be on combinations of several low-cardinality
%       columns [1] and the table is very large [1], the most effective
%       solution would be to place bitmap indexes on status, city, state and
%       country [1].
% 
%       B-tree indexes on any of the individual columns would not be ideal
%       because of their low cardinality. A possible alternative is a
%       composite B-tree index on all four columns [1 for suggesting this if
%       appropriate], but this is not ideal and would be much larger than
%       the four bitmap indexes [1 for this explanation if appropriate].
%       Hashing is definitely \emph{not} an option, because very few queries
%       are exact match.
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{7}
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{5}\label{nonindex}
%       Assuming that there are two identical fast disks available, describe
%       and justify two alternative \emph{non index-based} physical tuning
%       solutions that will improve the performance of queries on the
%       \textsf{Customer} table. For each solution include details of how
%       the two disks will be used. (No code is required.)
%       \begin{marking}
%         Alternative 1: partition the table across the two disks based on
%         status (four partitions, one for each status value) [1]. This will
%         allow simultaneous parallel access to different parts of the table
%         by the different groups [1]. Since two groups both access silver
%         and gold customers, it makes sense to put the silver customers on
%         disk one and the gold customers on disk two. Bronze customers
%         account for 50\% of the table, so it makes sense to also put them
%         on disk two (as the gold customers are the smallest group), and
%         put the inactive customers on disk one with the silver customers.
%         [1 for any sensible partitioning scheme]
%   
%         Alternative 2: replicate the table across both disks (one replica
%         on each disk) [1]. This will also provide simultaneous parallel
%         access to the data (hard to tell whether this would be better or
%         worse than the partitioning above) [1].
%   
%         Note that any solution must be capable of being implemented in
%         Oracle8.
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
% 
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       Briefly discuss the relative advantages and/or disadvantages of the
%       two alternative solutions you described in part~(\ref{nonindex})
%       above.
%       \begin{marking}
%         The partitioning solution given above doesn't really help with the
%         bronze customer rows---we would need random horizontal
%         partitioning to really help with this, which Oracle8 doesn't
%         support. More generally, Oracle8 does not migrate rows into the
%         correct partition if a customer's status changes, so the data will
%         need to be reloaded occasionally [1].
% 
%         For replication, we have the usual problem of keeping the replicas
%         synchronised if they are both read/write. This is somewhat
%         mitigated by the fact that there are only two copies [1].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
% 
% \newpage
% 
% \begin{question}{10}
%   There are two generic parameters that affect the structure of a B-tree
%   index.
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{6}
%     Identify these two parameters and describe what each parameter
%     specifies. Use diagrams to illustrate your answer.
%     \begin{marking}
%       \emph{Node size} [1] specifies the maximum number of pointers in
%       each index node [1]. Suitable diagram [1].
% 
%       \emph{Percentage fill} [1] specifies the number of pointers in each
%       index node that are allocated when a node is created [1]. In effect,
%       it determines the amount of free space left in each node. Suitable
%       diagram [1].
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
%   
%   \begin{subquestion}{4}
%     For each of the two parameters, discuss the practical effect(s) of:
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       high values of the parameter; and
%       \begin{marking}
%         Large node size reduces the height of the B-tree, resulting in
%         potentially fewer I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. It
%         can however increase the number of rows locked in a single leaf
%         node [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%   
%         High percent fill means that most pointers in a node will be
%         allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves
%         little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values
%         that change [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%     \begin{subsubquestion}{2}
%       low values of the parameter.
%       \begin{marking}
%         Small node size increases the height of the B-tree, resulting in
%         potentially more I/Os to access a leaf node [$\frac{1}{2}$]. The
%         number of rows locked in a single leaf node will be reduced
%         [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%   
%         Low percent fill means that most pointers in a node will not be
%         allocated when the node is created [$\frac{1}{2}$]. This leaves
%         little free space in the B-tree for new key values or key values
%         that change [$\frac{1}{2}$].
%       \end{marking}
%     \end{subsubquestion}
%   \end{subquestion}
% \end{question}
%   
%   
% \begin{question}{5}\label{clusterq}
% 
%   \begin{subquestion}{2}
%     Define what is meant by the term ``clustering'' in the context of
%     physical database design and tuning, and explain why it is beneficial.
% 
%     \begin{marking}
%       Clustering is the grouping of related rows physically near to each
%       other on disk [1] so that they may be retrieved in as few I/Os as
%       possible (ideally one)---beneficial because of the slowness of disk
%       I/O compared to memory I/O [1].
%     \end{marking}
%   \end{subquestion}
%   
%   \begin{subquestion}{3}\label{clusterqcode}
%     Consider the following Oracle8 SQL table definition:
%     
%     \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{}
% create table enrolment
% (  student_id char(7),
%   paper_code char(7),
%   enrol_year number(4),
%   
%   primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year)
% );
%     \end{lstlisting}
% 
%     The \textsf{Enrolment} table is often queried for all rows relating to
%     a particular student in a particular year (for example, student
%     1234567 in 1998, student 9876543 in 2000, etc.). Write appropriate
%     Oracle8 SQL code that will cluster the rows of the table in such a way
%     as to support these types of query (you do not need to calculate
%     cluster sizes). Relevant Oracle8 syntax diagrams are given on the next
%     page.
%     \begin{marking}
%       \begin{lstlisting}[language={[Oracle8]SQL}]{}
% create cluster enrolment_cluster (student_id char(7), year number(4));
% 
% create index enrol_cluster_index on cluster enrolment_cluster;
% 
% create table enrolment
% (  student_id char(7),
%   paper_code char(7),
%   enrol_year number(4),
%   
%   primary key (student_id, paper_code, enrol_year)
% ) cluster enrolment_cluster(student_id, enrol_year);
%       \end{lstlisting}
%     \end{marking}
%     [1] each for correct cluster, cluster index and table clustering.
%   \end{subquestion}
% 
% \end{question}
% 
% \end{examsection}
%       .
%       .
%       .
% \end{document}
% \end{verbatim}
% \normalsize
% 
% \begin{figure}
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-1}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-2}}
% 	
% 	\begin{center}
% 		\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg1-3}}
% 	\end{center}
% 
% 	\caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam}.}
% 	\label{Fig.Example}
% \end{figure}
% 
% \begin{figure}
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-2}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-3}}
% 	
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-4}}
% 	\hfill
% 	\fbox{\includegraphics[scale=0.28]{eg2-5}}
% 
% 	\caption{Output produced by \textsf{ouexam} when
% 			\textsf{markingschedule} is used.}
% 	\label{Fig.Example2}
% \end{figure}
% 
% 
% \StopEventually{}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS Revamped and tided up documentation and code.}
% 
% \section{The code}
% 
% \subsection{Preamble}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1998/06/01]
\ProvidesClass{ouexam}[\shortdate\space v\fileversion\space Otago %
                                      University examination paper]
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\@unsupported}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/10}{NJS New \cs{@unsupported} macro.}
% This macro is used to handle documents written for older versions of
% \textsf{ouexam}. All obsolete macros map to this macro, which prints out an
% appropriate error message. It needs to be defined early because it is used
% to trap use of the obsolete \textsf{multichoice} class option.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@unsupported#1{\ClassError{ouexam}{INCOMPATIBLE (#1): this %
  document was written for an earlier version of ouexam and is %
  not compatible with ouexam v\fileversion\space Please use ouexam %
  v1.2 or earlier to process this document. Version 1.2 can be %
  downloaded from the same location as version\space\fileversion}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{multichoice}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \textsf{multichoice} class option.}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/04}{NJS Removed support for \textsf{multichoice} option.}
% The \textsf{multichoice} class option is no longer supported, but rather than
% just breaking older documents, we can at least try to present a reasonable
% error message.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{multichoice}{%
  \OptionNotUsed\@unsupported{multichoice class option}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{twoside}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Turned off \textsf{twoside} option.}
% This document class is based on the \textsf{article} class and accepts any of
% the options accepted by \textsf{article}. The \textsf{twoside} option does
% not really make sense, however---all Otago examination papers are printed
% single-sided anyway, and the format is such that two-sided printing would
% look no different. The \textsf{twoside} option is therefore not used in this
% class.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\OptionNotUsed}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{draft}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New \textsf{draft} class option.}
% \begin{macro}{\if@draft}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS New switch for \textsf{draft}.}
% The \textsf{draft} option determines whether the examination is to be printed
% in draft mode (default off). The \cs{if@draft} switch is used to determine
% whether this is in effect (default false). Draft mode has the usual effects
% that you would expect for draft mode in the \textsf{article} class, plus
% \fbox{DRAFT} is printed in the header of every page.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@draft \@draftfalse
\DeclareOption{draft}{\@drafttrue}
% does this need to be passed to the article class?
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Note that if you use the \textsf{graphicx} package and turn on the
% \textsf{draft} option in \textsf{ouexam}, all included graphics will
% be drawn in draft mode unless you specify the |draft=false| option to the
% \cs{includegraphics} macro. The amount of effort required to fix what is
% a relatively small issue isn't really worth it, so this will not change.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{markingschedule}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New \textsf{markingschedule} class option.}
% \begin{macro}{\if@markingschedule}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/05}{NJS New switch for \textsf{markingschedule}.}
% The \textsf{markingschedule} option determines whether marking schedule
% information is printed in addition to the questions (default off). The
% \cs{if@markingschedule} switch is used to determine whether this is in effect
% (default false).
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newif\if@markingschedule \@markingschedulefalse
\DeclareOption{markingschedule}{\@markingscheduletrue}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% All other options are passed directly to the \textsf{article} class:
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
\ProcessOptions
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Changed default point size to 12pt.}
% The defaults for this class are \textsf{onecolumn}, \textsf{oneside},
% \textsf{a4paper} and \textsf{12pt}. The font size is the only one that might
% need to change.
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\LoadClass[onecolumn,oneside,a4paper,12pt]{article}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Required packages}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/08}{NJS Removed requirement for \textsf{calc} and
% \textsf{ifthen} packages.}
% The only required package is the \textsf{verbatim} package, which is used
% to implement the \textsf{marking} environment:
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\RequirePackage{verbatim}
%    \end{macrocode}
%
% 
% \subsection{Page setup}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\oddsidemargin}
% \begin{macro}{\topmargin}
% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
% A4 paper is assumed (since this class is intended only for Otago examination
% papers, this seems a reasonable assumption). The margins are top and bottom
% 2cm, left and right 2.54cm (1in).
%
%    \begin{macrocode}
\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{0cm}
\setlength{\topmargin}{-0.54cm}
\setlength{\textwidth}{15.92cm}
\setlength{\textheight}{25.7cm}
\advance\textheight by-\headheight
\advance\textheight by-\headsep
\advance\textheight by-\footskip
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Page styles}\label{pagestyles}
%
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS Added support to page styles for \textsf{draft}
% and \textsf{markingschedule} class options.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/15}{NJS Fixed headers so that the page number is always
% centered.}
%
% \begin{macro}{\ps@plain}
% The \textsf{plain} page style is based on that in the \textsf{article} class,
% and produces pages with the page number centered at the top, the paper number
% in the top right corner and the text ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'' in the bottom
% right. If semester information is specified, this is included in parentheses
% after the paper code, for example, ``COMP 101 (Semester Two)''.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@plain{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Note that we have to get a bit clever to ensure that the page number is
% properly centered in the page header. The naive solution is just to use
% \cs{hfill}s, but this will cause the page number to shift around depending on
% the length of \cs{@pnumber}. Piet van Oostrum's \textsf{fancyhdr} package will
% do this for us, but it seems a bit of overkill to require this package merely
% so that we can ensure that the page number remains centered. Instead, we've
% borrowed the relevant technique from that class, which draws the left, centre
% and right bits of the header as three overlapping boxes. You just have to be
% careful that the value of \cs{@pnumber} isn't so long that it overwrites the
% page number.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill
    \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill
    \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber
      \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}}
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \textsf{plain} is the default page style:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\pagestyle{plain}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\ps@lastpage}
% The \textsf{lastpage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without the
% ``\textbf{TURN OVER}'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@lastpage{%
  \def\@oddhead{%
    \rlap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedright\@draft\strut}}\hfill
    \parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\centering\textrm{\thepage}\strut}\hfill
    \llap{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{\raggedleft\@pnumber
      \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\ (\@semester)\fi\strut}}}
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule}
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \textsf{lastpage} should be automatically applied to the last page of the
% document:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{\thispagestyle{lastpage}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\ps@titlepage}
% The \textsf{titlepage} page style is similar to \textsf{plain}, but without
% the header.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\ps@titlepage{%
  \def\@oddhead{\@draft}%
  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead%
  \def\@oddfoot{\@markingschedule\hfill\textbf{TURN OVER}}%
  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot%
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Various counters}
% 
% Earlier versions of \textsf{ouexam} used the \textsf{enumerate}
% environment to build questions, which meant that special counters were not
% required. This version of the class, however, uses a different mechanism for
% building questions, so we need to define custom counters for several things.
% 
% \begin{macro}{question}
% \begin{macro}{subquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subquestion} counter.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question number from
% \cs{labelsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(a)''
% instead of ``1(a)''.}
% \begin{macro}{subsubquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubquestion} counter.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS The \texttt{subsubquestion} was incorrectly
% printing as ``(a)'' rather than ``(i)''. Fixed.}
% \changes{2.0.1}{2000/04/30}{NJS Removed prefixed question numbers from
% \cs{labelsubsubquestion} macro so that references now print as just ``(i)''
% instead of ``1(a)(i)''.}
% First, we define three counters for the three possible levels of question:
% top-level question, second-level sub-question or third-level sub-sub-question:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{question}
\newcounter{subquestion}[question]
\newcounter{subsubquestion}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% The three question levels are numbered as 1., (a) and (i) respectively, so we
% also need to redefine the associated \cs{the} and \cs{label} macros
% appropriately:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\renewcommand{\thequestion}{\arabic{question}}
\newcommand{\labelquestion}{\arabic{question}.}

\renewcommand{\thesubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})}
\newcommand{\labelsubquestion}{(\alph{subquestion})}

\renewcommand{\thesubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})}
\newcommand{\labelsubsubquestion}{(\roman{subsubquestion})}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{examexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examexpected} counter.}
% The |examexpected| counter stores the total expected number of marks for the
% examination, and defaults to 100:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{examexpected}
\setcounter{examexpected}{100}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \begin{macro}{examoutof}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examoutof} macro.}
% To specify that an examination is out of some number of marks other than
% 100, use the \cs{examoutof} macro to set the value:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\examoutof}[1]{\setcounter{examexpected}{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{sectexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{sectexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{qexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \cs{qexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subqexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqexpected} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subsubqexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subsubqexpected} counter.}
% The next four counters perform the same function as the |examexpected| counter
% for sections, questions, sub-questions and sub-sub-questions respectively. No
% macros are required to set these values as they are set automatically by the
% question-building environments.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{sectexpected}
\newcounter{qexpected}
\newcounter{subqexpected}
\newcounter{subsubqexpected}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{lastexpected}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{lastexpected} counter.}
% The |lastexpected| counter records the expected marks total for the last
% question. This will eventually be used to verify that the marks total for a
% marking schedule equals the marks total for the corresponding question, but
% this hasn't been implemented yet.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{lastexpected}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{examrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{examrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{sectrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \texttt{sectrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{qrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{qrunning} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{subqrunning}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{subqrunning} counter.}
% These four counters keep track of the running total of marks for the
% current examination, section, question and subquestion respectively. This
% is later compared against the corresponding expected total. A running total
% is not needed for sub-sub-questions because they do not have sub-parts. The
% |qrunning| and |subqrunning| counters are reset when the associated
% question counters are incremented.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{examrunning}
\setcounter{examrunning}{0}
\newcounter{sectrunning}
\newcounter{qrunning}[question]
\newcounter{subqrunning}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{hassubs}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubs} counter.}
% \begin{macro}{hassubsubs}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS New \texttt{hassubsubs} counter.}
% These two counters are used to track whether questions and
% sub-questions have sub-parts. Counters are used rather than booleans because
% counters are set globally and booleans are not (or at least do not appear to
% be). Both counters reset when the associated question counters are
% incremented.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{hassubs}[question]
\newcounter{hassubsubs}[subquestion]
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% At the end of the document, check that the running total of marks for the
% examination matches what we were expecting:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \ifnum\theexamexpected=\theexamrunning
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual number of marks for exam %
      (\theexamrunning) does not match expected number of marks %
      (\theexamexpected)}
  \fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \begin{macro}{xsection}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/29}{NJS New \texttt{xsection} counter.}
% Finally, we set up a counter for the section ``number'' and define it so
% that it prints out as an upper case letter rather than a number. We could
% just redefine the |section| counter, but that interferes with the section
% numbering in the documentation, and we can't have that, can we? |:)|
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcounter{xsection}
\setcounter{xsection}{0}
\renewcommand{\thexsection}{\Alph{xsection}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% 
% \subsection{Question-building environments and associated items}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{question} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct
% placement of marks in output.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/15}{NJS Total marks for a question are now printed only
% if the question has no sub-questions.}
% \begin{environment}{question}
% The \textsf{question} environment specifies a top-level question, and produces
% questions numbered in the form ``1.'', ``2.'', etc. It has one mandatory
% argument, the number of marks allocated to the question, which is used to
% initialise the |qexpected| counter\footnote{If it were not for the fact that
% you can only refer to environment arguments in the environment preamble, the
% \texttt{qexpected} counter would be unnecessary.}. If the argument is left
% empty, default to zero for the number of marks:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{question}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{qexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{qexpected}{#1}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% For each top-level question, we increment the |question| counter, which also
% resets the |hassubs| and |qrunning| counters to zero:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \refstepcounter{question}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The question itself is built using a single-item \textsf{list} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begin{list}{\labelquestion}{}
    \item 
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, the following things happen:
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item If the question has no sub-questions, the value of the |qexpected|
% 	counter is added to |examrunning| and |sectrunning|, and both |qrunning|
% 	and |lastexpected| are set to the value of |qexpected|.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
}{%
    \ifnum\thehassubs=0
      \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
      \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
      \setcounter{qrunning}{\value{qexpected}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	The total number of marks for the question is then printed right-justified
% 	on the line as ``(\emph{m} marks)'' where \emph{m} is the value of the
% 	|qrunning| counter. The environment determines whether to print ``mark'' or
% 	``marks'' automatically, and figures out whether the number of marks will fit
% 	on the last line of the question or needs to be placed on the next line.
% 	The code for handling the line breaking is derived from an example on page
% 	106 of \emph{The \TeX{}book}:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
      \hfil(\theqrunning~\ifnum\theqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi)
      \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item If the question \emph{does} have sub-questions, then |qrunning|,
% 	|examrunning| and |sectrunning| have already been set by the various
% 	sub-environments. The value of |qrunning| is then compared with
% 	|qexpected|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number
% 	of marks for the question is \emph{not} printed in this case.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \else
      \ifnum\theqrunning=\theqexpected
      \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\theqrunning) for %
          question \thequestion\space doesn't match expected mark %
          (\theqexpected)}
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item |lastexpected| is set to the value of |qexpected| so it can be used
% 	in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{qexpected}}
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% \end{enumerate}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{environment}{subquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subquestion} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement
% of marks in output.}
% The \textsf{subquestion} environment is the analogue of \textsf{question} for
% sub-questions. On initialisation, it sets |subqexpected| to the value of the
% mandatory argument (defaulting to zero if the argument is empty), increments
% the |hassubs| counter so that the enclosing \textsf{question} environment can
% react appropriately, increments |subquestion| (thus resetting |hassubsubs| and
% |subqrunning| to zero) and opens a single-item list with numbering of the form
% ``(a)'', ``(b)'', etc.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subquestion}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subqexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}\fi
  \setcounter{subqexpected}{#1}
  \addtocounter{hassubs}{1}
  \refstepcounter{subquestion}
  \begin{list}{\labelsubquestion}{}
    \item 
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, if performs similar checks to the
% \textsf{question} environment. If the sub-question has no sub-sub-questions,
% the value of |subqexpected| is added to |qrunning| and |sectrunning|:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \ifnum\thehassubsubs=0
      \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
      \setcounter{subqrunning}{\value{subqexpected}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Then the number of marks for the sub-question are typeset in a similar manner
% to the \textsf{question} environment:
%    \begin{macrocode}
      \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
      \hfil(\thesubqrunning~\ifnum\thesubqrunning=1 mark\else marks\fi)
      \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% If the sub-question \emph{does} have sub-sub-questions, check the running total
% against the expected number and raise an error if they don't match.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \else
      \ifnum\thesubqrunning=\thesubqexpected
      \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesubqrunning) for %
          question \thesubquestion\space doesn't match expected mark %
          (\thesubqexpected)}
      \fi
    \fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Finally, set |lastexpected| to the value of |qexpected| so it can be used
% in any subsequent \textsf{marking} environment.
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subqexpected}}
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{environment}{subsubquestion}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS \textsf{subsubquestion} environment no longer a
% redefinition of \textsf{enumerate}.}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/13}{NJS Added penalty handling to ensure correct placement
% of marks in output.}
% This is similar to both \textsf{question} and \textsf{subquestion}, and
% generates an appropriately numbered sub-sub-question (``(i)'', ``(ii)'', etc.).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{subsubquestion}[1]{%
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{subsubqexpected}{#1}\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% Increment |hassubsubs| so that the enclosing \textsf{subquestion} environment
% can react appropriately:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \addtocounter{hassubsubs}{1}
  \refstepcounter{subsubquestion}
  \begin{list}{\labelsubsubquestion}{}
    \item 
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Closing this environment is a bit simpler than the previous two because we
% don't need to check whether the sub-sub-question has any sub-components (this
% never happens). All we have to do is set the appropriate counters and typeset
% the number of marks.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \addtocounter{examrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{sectrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{qrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \addtocounter{subqrunning}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \setcounter{lastexpected}{\value{subsubqexpected}}
    \unskip\nobreak\hfil\penalty50\hskip2em\hbox{}\nobreak
    \hfil(\thesubsubqexpected~\ifnum\thesubsubqexpected=1 mark
                              \else marks\fi)
    \parfillskip=0pt \finalhyphendemerits=0 \par
  \end{list}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{environment}
% 
% Note that none of these three environments check whether they are correctly
% nested (i.e., \textsf{subsubquestion} within \textsf{subquestion} within
% \textsf{question}).
% 
% 
% \subsection{Draft examination printing}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\@marking}
% \changes{2.0}{2001/05/17}{NJS New \cs{@draft} macro.}
% Specifying the \textsf{draft} option causes \textsf{ouexam} to print
% \fbox{DRAFT} in large letters in the header of every page. This is drawn by
% the \cs{@draft} macro, which is included in the page header definition of
% all the page styles for this class (see
% \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref*{pagestyles}}). \textbf{Note:} Because
% the \cs{@draft} macro is included in the page header, it will usually
% overflow the page boundaries, causing ``|Overfull \vbox|'' warnings. Note
% the extra set of braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@draft\def\@draft{{\Huge\fbox{DRAFT}}}
\else\let\@draft\@empty
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Marking schedule information}
% 
% \begin{environment}{marking}
% \begin{macro}{\@markingschedule}
% \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New \textsf{marking} environment for including
% answers and/or marking schedule information.}
% \changes{2.0}{2000/09/11}{NJS Now prints ``MARKING SCHEDULE'' at the bottom
% of every page if the \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified.}
% The \textsf{marking} environment allows the specification of marking
% schedule information in the same location as the questions. If the
% \textsf{markingschedule} class option is specified, marking schedule
% information is printed in italics. In addition, \fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE} is
% printed in large letters in the footer of every page. This is drawn by the
% \cs{@markingschedule} macro, which is included in the page footer
% definition of all the page styles for this class (see
% \hyperref[pagestyles]{section~\ref*{pagestyles}}). Note the extra set of
% braces to limit the scope of the \cs{Huge}.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\if@markingschedule
  \newenvironment{marking}{\itshape}{\normalfont}
  \def\@markingschedule{{\Huge\fbox{MARKING SCHEDULE}}}
\else
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% Normally \textsf{marking} just maps to the \textsf{comment} environment from
% Rainer Sch\"{o}pf's \textsf{verbatim} package, i.e., marking information is not
% printed:
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \let\marking\comment
  \let\endmarking\endcomment
  \let\@markingschedule\@empty
\fi
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Section handling}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS new \textsf{examsection} environment.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS New \cs{@defsecinst} macro.}
% \begin{environment}{examsection}
% \begin{macro}{\@defsecinst}
% The \textsf{examsection} environment specifies a major section of an
% examination paper. Sections are sequentially numbered ``A'', ``B'', etc. The
% environment has three arguments:
% 
% \begin{enumerate}
% 	\item The expected number of marks for the section.
% 
% 	\item The instructions for this section. This defaults to ``ANSWER ALL
%	QUESTIONS.'' if left blank. To change the default text, redefine the
%	\cs{@defsecinst} macro.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@defsecinst{ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.}
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% 	\item A description of the contents of the section which may be left blank.
% \end{enumerate}
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{examsection}[3]{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% Every section begins on a new page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newpage
%    \end{macrocode}
% If the argument for the number of marks is left empty, default to zero.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \def\@nummarks{#1}
  \ifx\@nummarks\@empty\setcounter{sectexpected}{0}
  \else\setcounter{sectexpected}{#1}\fi
  \refstepcounter{xsection}
  \setcounter{sectrunning}{0}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in
% \cs{large} size.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}}
  \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  \def\@usersecinst{#2}
  \ifx\@usersecinst\@empty\@defsecinst\else\@usersecinst\fi\par
  \def\@usersectopic{#3}
  \ifx\@usersectopic\@empty\else\par\noindent\@usersectopic\fi \\
}{%
%    \end{macrocode}
% 
% When the environment closes, the value of |sectrunning| is compared against
% |sectexpected|, and a warning is raised if they do not match. The total number
% marks for the section is printed in the form ``\textbf{[SECTION A TOTAL
% \emph{m} MARKS]}'' where \emph{m} is the value of |sectrunning|.
% 
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \ifnum\thesectrunning=\thesectexpected
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{actual mark (\thesectrunning) for section %
      \thexsection\space doesn't match expected mark (\thesectexpected)}
  \fi
  \bigskip\hfill\textbf{[SECTION \thexsection\ TOTAL %
                              \thesectrunning\ MARKS]}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
%
% \begin{macro}{\newsection}
% \textbf{[DEPRECATED]} The \cs{newsection} macro generates a new examination
% section, appropriately numbered. The optional argument contains instructions
% for answering the questions in the new section, and defaults to ``ANSWER ALL
% QUESTIONS''. This macro is included only for backwards compatibility with
% previous versions. The \textsf{examsection} environment replaces this macro
% and should be used in new documents. This macro will eventually be deleted.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\newsection}[1][ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS.]{%
  \ClassWarning{ouexam}{DEPRECATED: The \protect\newsection\space %
      macro is deprecated; use the examsection environment instead}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Every section begins on a new page.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \newpage
  \refstepcounter{xsection}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The section title is formatted as ``\textbf{\underline{Section A}}'', in
% \cs{large} size. Note that sections are ``numbered'' A, B, \ldots.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  {\large\noindent\textbf{\underline{Section~\thexsection}}}
  \\[0.5\baselineskip]
  #1
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% 
% \subsection{Title page generation}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\examyear}
% \begin{macro}{\@year}
% The \cs{examyear} macro specifies the year in which the examination is being
% held. It redefines the \cs{@year} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\examyear}[1]{\def\@year{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This macro is required:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@year{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\examyear\space was specified}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\department}
% \begin{macro}{\@dept}
% The \cs{department} macro specifies the name of the department, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@dept} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\department}[1]{\def\@dept{#1}}
\def\@dept{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\department\space was specified}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\papernumber}
% \begin{macro}{\@pnumber}
% The \cs{papernumber} macro specifies the paper number, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@pnumber} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\papernumber}[1]{\def\@pnumber{#1}}
\def\@pnumber{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papernumber\space was specified}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\papertitle}
% \begin{macro}{\@ptitle}
% The \cs{papertitle} macro specifies the title of the paper, and is required.
% It redefines the \cs{@ptitle} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\papertitle}[1]{\def\@ptitle{#1}}
\def\@ptitle{%
  \ClassError{ouexam}{no \protect\papertitle\space was specified}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\semester}
% \begin{macro}{\@semester}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/14}{NJS Rewrote \cs{semester} to support summer school
% and special exams.}
% The \cs{semester} macro specifies which semester the examination is for. Legal
% values for the argument are ``1'', ``2'', ``SS'' for summer school or ``SP'' for
% a special examination---anything else is ignored.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@ONE{1}
\def\@TWO{2}
\def\@SS{SS}
\def\@SP{SP}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This macro redefines the \cs{@semester} macro which is used in
% \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\semester}[1]{%
  \def\@sem{#1}
  \ifx\@sem\@ONE\def\@semester{Semester One}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@TWO\def\@semester{Semester Two}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@SS\def\@semester{Summer School}
  \else\ifx\@sem\@SP\def\@semester{Special Examination}
  \else\ClassWarning{ouexam}{invalid value `#1' for %
    \protect\semester\space; valid values are `1', `2', `SS' %
    and `SP'. No semester information will be printed}
  \fi\fi\fi\fi
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{semester} is optional---if you omit it or give it an invalid argument,
% \cs{@semester} remains empty.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@semester\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\timeallowed}
% \begin{macro}{\@hours}
% The \cs{timeallowed} macro specifies the length of the examination in hours.
% It redefines the \cs{@hours} macro which is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\timeallowed}[1]{\def\@hours{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{timeallowed} is optional---if you omit it, \cs{@hours} defaults to ``3'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@hours{3}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{num.pages}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed label from \cs{page.last}.}
% There is no macro to specify the number of pages in the examination because
% it is done automatically by inserting a \cs{newlabel} that refers to the last
% page directly into the |.aux| file:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\newlabel{num.pages}{{}{\thepage}}}
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% This label is then referenced in \cs{@maketitlepage}.
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{num.questions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS New \cs{num.questions} label representing the
% number of questions.}
% Similarly, there is no macro to specify the number of questions in the
% examination. This is calculated using the same method as for the number of
% pages:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\AtEndDocument{%
  \immediate\write\@auxout{%
    \string\newlabel{num.questions}{{}{\thequestion}}
  }
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\instructions}
% \begin{macro}{\@instructions}
% The \cs{instructions} macro specifies instructions on how candidates should
% answer questions. It redefines the \cs{@instructions} macro that is used in
% \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@instructions{Answer \underline{ALL} questions.}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{instructions} is optional. If you omit it, \cs{@instructions} defaults
% to ``Answer \underline{ALL} questions.'' 
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\instructions}[1]{\def\@instructions{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\material}
% \begin{macro}{\@material}
% The \cs{material} macro lets specifies any additional material that candidates
% are provided in addition to the examination paper itself, and is optional.
% It redefines the \cs{@material} macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@material\@empty
\newcommand{\material}[1]{\def\@material{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\allowcalculators}
% \begin{macro}{\@calculators}
% The \cs{allowcalculators} macro specifies whether or not calculators are
% allowed in the examination. If \cs{allowcalculators} is omitted, \cs{@calculators}
% defaults to ``may not'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@calculators{may not}
%    \end{macrocode}
% Issuing an \cs{allowcalculators} changes the redefines \cs{@calculators} to
% ``may'':
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\allowcalculators}{\def\@calculators{may}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \cs{@calculators} is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}.
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\copiesof}
% \begin{macro}{\@copiesof}
% The \cs{copiesof} macro specifies any material that candidates are allowed to
% bring into the examination, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@copiesof}
% macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@copiesof\@empty
\newcommand{\copiesof}[1]{\def\@copiesof{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\otherinstructions}
% \begin{macro}{\@otherinst}
% The \cs{otherinstructions} macro specifies any other instructions not covered
% by any of the above, and is optional. It redefines the \cs{@otherinst}
% macro that is used in \cs{@maketitlepage}:
%    \begin{macrocode}
\let\@otherinst\@empty
\newcommand{\otherinstructions}[1]{\def\@otherinst{#1}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\maketitlepage}
% The \cs{maketitlepage} macro is the \textsf{ouexam} analogue of \cs{maketitle}.
% It takes all of the information provided by the above macros and generates a
% properly formatted examination title page. If you want to design your own title
% page styles, redefine \cs{@maketitlepage} (this is not normally recommended
% however).
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\maketitlepage}{\@maketitlepage}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
% \begin{macro}{\@maketitlepage}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Renamed macro from \cs{maketitlepage}.}
% The \cs{@maketitlepage} macro generates an examination title page that
% meets the Otago University requirements for final examination papers. You
% can redefine this if you want to change the format, but normally you would
% not do this.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\def\@maketitlepage{%
  \thispagestyle{titlepage}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The header information for the examination is printed centered at the top
% of the page. The department, paper number and paper title (and the semester
% information if required) are placed inside a double box.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \begin{center}
    {\Large \textbf{UNIVERSITY OF OTAGO EXAMINATIONS \@year}}
    \\[\baselineskip]
    \fbox{\framebox[\linewidth]{%
      \begin{tabular}{c}
        \\
        {\large \@dept} \\
        \\
        {\large Paper \@pnumber} \\
        \\
        {\large \@ptitle} \\
        \ifx\@semester\@empty\else\@semester \\ \fi
        \\
      \end{tabular}%
    }}
    \mbox{}\\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Next, the time allowed for completing the examination:
%    \begin{macrocode}
    \textbf{(TIME ALLOWED: \@hours\ HOURS)}
    \\[\baselineskip]
  \end{center}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The number of pages is automatically calculated, as described earlier. All we
% need to do is reference the |num.pages| label that we put into the |.aux|
% file:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{This examination paper comprises \pageref{num.pages}
             pages.}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out the instructions for answering questions:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Candidates should answer questions as follows:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@instructions\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out any provided material:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{The following material is provided:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@material\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out use of calculators section:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Use of calculators:} \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}
    Electronic calculators \@calculators\ be used in this examination.
    \\[\baselineskip]
    Please note: where the use of calculators is permitted, these
    must be non-pro\-gram\-ma\-ble, hand-held calculators without
    alphabetic key pads.
  \end{minipage} \\[\baselineskip]
  \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.)
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out anything that candidates are allowed to bring:
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Candidates are permitted copies of:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@copiesof\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \mbox{}\hfill(Subject to inspection by the examiners.)
  \\[\baselineskip]
%    \end{macrocode}
% Print out other instructions, and finish.
%    \begin{macrocode}
  \underline{Other Instructions:}
  \\[\baselineskip]
  \hspace*{1cm}\begin{minipage}{13.5cm}\@otherinst\end{minipage}
  \\[\baselineskip]
 
  \newpage
}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
%
%
% \subsection{Obsolete macros and environments}
% 
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS All \textsf{multichoice} macros and environments
% made obsolete.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \cs{markingschedule}, \cs{marks}, \cs{totalmarks}
% macros made obsolete.}
% \changes{2.0}{2002/01/09}{NJS \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions},
% \textsf{subsubquestions} environments made obsolete.}
% The following macros and environments are no longer supported as of version
% 2.0. Documents that use these macros can be processed using ouexam v1.2 or
% earlier. The obsolete multiple-choice examination support is dealt with
% during option processing, so we can ignore the obsolete multiple-choice
% macros.
% 
% \begin{environment}{questions}
% \begin{environment}{subquestions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is
% active.}
% \begin{environment}{subsubquestions}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Now disabled when \textsf{multichoice} is
% active.}
% \begin{macro}{markingschedule}
% \changes{1.2}{1999/10/26}{NJS New macro to turn marking information on and
% off.}
% The \textsf{questions}, \textsf{subquestions} and \textsf{subsubquestions}
% environments have been replaced by the \textsf{question},
% \textsf{subquestion} and \textsf{subsubquestion} environments respectively.
%   \begin{macrocode}
\newenvironment{questions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{questions environment}}}{}
\newenvironment{subquestions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{subquestions environment}}}{}
\newenvironment{subsubquestions}{%
  \def\item{\@unsupported{subsubquestions environment}}}{}
%    \end{macrocode}
% The \cs{markingschedule} macro has been replaced by the
% \textsf{markingschedule} class option. We can't map this to the
% \cs{@unsupported} macro because \cs{markingschedule} occurs in the document
% preamble. Mapping it to \cs{@unsupported} causes \TeX\ to blow up for some
% reason. It's safe enough to ignore it.
%   \begin{macrocode}
\let\markingschedule\@empty
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% \end{environment}
% 
% \begin{macro}{\marks}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS This macro now increments the \texttt{marks}
% counter.}
% \begin{macro}{\totalmarks}
% \changes{1.1}{1999/04/20}{NJS Removed the parameter for the number of marks;
% Both these macros have been replaced by automatic calculations within the
% question-building environments.}
% The \cs{marks} macro has been replaced by the argument to the various
% question-building environments. The \cs{totalmarks} macro has been replaced
% by automatic calculations within these environments.
%    \begin{macrocode}
\newcommand{\marks}[1]{\@unsupported{marks macro}}
\newcommand{\totalmarks}{\@unsupported{totalmarks macro}}
%    \end{macrocode}
% \end{macro}
% \end{macro}
% 
%
% 
% \Finale
% 
% \PrintChanges

Show line notes below